US20200140489A1 - Peptide-Based Quorum Sensing Inhibitors for the Attenuation of Virulence in Staphylococcus Aureus - Google Patents
Peptide-Based Quorum Sensing Inhibitors for the Attenuation of Virulence in Staphylococcus Aureus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20200140489A1 US20200140489A1 US16/737,749 US202016737749A US2020140489A1 US 20200140489 A1 US20200140489 A1 US 20200140489A1 US 202016737749 A US202016737749 A US 202016737749A US 2020140489 A1 US2020140489 A1 US 2020140489A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- group
- optionally substituted
- aip
- iii
- hydrogen
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 230000001018 virulence Effects 0.000 title claims description 10
- 241000191967 Staphylococcus aureus Species 0.000 title abstract description 20
- 229940123361 Quorum sensing inhibitor Drugs 0.000 title 1
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 claims abstract description 184
- 241000191940 Staphylococcus Species 0.000 claims abstract description 16
- 238000011282 treatment Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 13
- 206010041925 Staphylococcal infections Diseases 0.000 claims abstract description 8
- QAOILFZLKHORKF-DWKLSMNSSA-N 2-[(3S,6S,9S,12S,15R)-15-[[(2S)-4-amino-2-[[(2S,3S)-2-amino-3-methylpentanoyl]amino]-4-oxobutanoyl]amino]-9-benzyl-3,6-bis(2-methylpropyl)-2,5,8,11,14-pentaoxo-1-thia-4,7,10,13-tetrazacyclohexadec-12-yl]acetic acid Chemical compound CC[C@H](C)[C@H](N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](Cc2ccccc2)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC1=O QAOILFZLKHORKF-DWKLSMNSSA-N 0.000 claims description 188
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 110
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 claims description 110
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 claims description 102
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 claims description 91
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 claims description 90
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 81
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 56
- 125000001072 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 54
- 125000003107 substituted aryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 49
- -1 cyclic thioester Chemical class 0.000 claims description 36
- 125000000547 substituted alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 36
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 35
- 125000001797 benzyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 claims description 32
- 101710101607 Toxic shock syndrome toxin-1 Proteins 0.000 claims description 30
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 claims description 29
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 28
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 claims description 27
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 claims description 24
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 claims description 18
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 claims description 18
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 claims description 18
- 229910052717 sulfur Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 18
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 17
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 13
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical group 0.000 claims description 13
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 13
- QPIROHVZMLYRNN-YRNJLPRFSA-N 2-[(3s,6s,9s,12s,15r)-15-[[(2s,3r)-2-[[(2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-amino-3-(4-hydroxyphenyl)propanoyl]amino]-3-hydroxypropanoyl]amino]-3-hydroxybutanoyl]amino]-9-benzyl-6-[(2s)-butan-2-yl]-3-(2-methylsulfanylethyl)-2,5,8,11,14-pentaoxo-1-thia-4,7,10,13-tetrazacyclohe Chemical compound C([C@H]1C(=O)N[C@H](C(N[C@@H](CCSC)C(=O)SC[C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N1)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)[C@@H](C)O)=O)[C@@H](C)CC)C1=CC=CC=C1 QPIROHVZMLYRNN-YRNJLPRFSA-N 0.000 claims description 11
- 239000003937 drug carrier Substances 0.000 claims description 10
- GOMDIOPXFUESDK-NWHYMTRRSA-N (2s)-2-[[(2s)-2-[(2-aminoacetyl)amino]-3-methylbutanoyl]amino]-n-[(2s)-1-[[(3s,6s,9s,12s,15r)-3-benzyl-9,12-bis(hydroxymethyl)-6-(2-methylpropyl)-2,5,8,11,14-pentaoxo-1-thia-4,7,10,13-tetrazacyclohexadec-15-yl]amino]-1-oxopropan-2-yl]butanediamide Chemical compound N1C(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)CN)C(C)C)CSC(=O)[C@@H]1CC1=CC=CC=C1 GOMDIOPXFUESDK-NWHYMTRRSA-N 0.000 claims description 9
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000005647 linker group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 7
- 125000002252 acyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 6
- 239000008194 pharmaceutical composition Substances 0.000 claims description 6
- GFJAORMOUQQBTE-XAQATAOCSA-N (2S,3R)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-amino-3-(4-hydroxyphenyl)propanoyl]amino]-3-hydroxypropanoyl]amino]-N-[(3S,6S,9S,12S,15R)-9-benzyl-6-[(2S)-butan-2-yl]-12-[(4-hydroxyphenyl)methyl]-3-(2-methylsulfanylethyl)-2,5,8,11,14-pentaoxo-1-thia-4,7,10,13-tetrazacyclohexadec-15-yl]-3-hydroxybutanamide Chemical compound CC[C@H](C)[C@@H]1NC(=O)[C@H](Cc2ccccc2)NC(=O)[C@H](Cc2ccc(O)cc2)NC(=O)[C@H](CSC(=O)[C@H](CCSC)NC1=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)Cc1ccc(O)cc1)[C@@H](C)O GFJAORMOUQQBTE-XAQATAOCSA-N 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000003342 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000000304 alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000004043 oxo group Chemical group O=* 0.000 claims description 5
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000004414 alkyl thio group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000001188 haloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000000959 isobutyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000000464 thioxo group Chemical group S=* 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000006273 (C1-C3) alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 3
- 230000002238 attenuated effect Effects 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000004093 cyano group Chemical group *C#N 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical group [H]S* 0.000 claims description 3
- IVRMZWNICZWHMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N azide group Chemical group [N-]=[N+]=[N-] IVRMZWNICZWHMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 2
- XLJMAIOERFSOGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M cyanate group Chemical group [O-]C#N XLJMAIOERFSOGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 claims description 2
- IQPQWNKOIGAROB-UHFFFAOYSA-N isocyanate group Chemical group [N-]=C=O IQPQWNKOIGAROB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 2
- 125000002462 isocyano group Chemical group *[N+]#[C-] 0.000 claims description 2
- 125000000449 nitro group Chemical group [O-][N+](*)=O 0.000 claims description 2
- 125000002914 sec-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 claims description 2
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical group 0.000 claims 4
- 125000004178 (C1-C4) alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims 2
- 150000008575 L-amino acids Chemical class 0.000 claims 2
- 208000015339 staphylococcus aureus infection Diseases 0.000 claims 1
- 230000005764 inhibitory process Effects 0.000 abstract description 33
- 230000018612 quorum sensing Effects 0.000 abstract description 33
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 abstract description 32
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 abstract description 19
- 239000003242 anti bacterial agent Substances 0.000 abstract description 8
- 229940088710 antibiotic agent Drugs 0.000 abstract description 8
- 241000191963 Staphylococcus epidermidis Species 0.000 abstract description 3
- 208000035143 Bacterial infection Diseases 0.000 abstract description 2
- 208000022362 bacterial infectious disease Diseases 0.000 abstract description 2
- ZMXDDKWLCZADIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-Dimethylformamide Chemical compound CN(C)C=O ZMXDDKWLCZADIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 66
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 61
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 50
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 50
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 48
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 46
- 108020003175 receptors Proteins 0.000 description 46
- 102000005962 receptors Human genes 0.000 description 46
- YMWUJEATGCHHMB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dichloromethane Chemical compound ClCCl YMWUJEATGCHHMB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 43
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 41
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 37
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 35
- 125000000623 heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 31
- WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetonitrile Chemical compound CC#N WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 30
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 25
- 206010018910 Haemolysis Diseases 0.000 description 24
- JGFZNNIVVJXRND-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-Diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) Chemical compound CCN(C(C)C)C(C)C JGFZNNIVVJXRND-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 24
- DTQVDTLACAAQTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trifluoroacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(F)(F)F DTQVDTLACAAQTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 24
- 235000004279 alanine Nutrition 0.000 description 24
- 230000008588 hemolysis Effects 0.000 description 24
- QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N L-alanine Chemical compound C[C@H](N)C(O)=O QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 23
- IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethylsulphoxide Chemical compound CS(C)=O IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 21
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 21
- 235000001014 amino acid Nutrition 0.000 description 20
- 229940024606 amino acid Drugs 0.000 description 20
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 20
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 description 20
- 230000003389 potentiating effect Effects 0.000 description 19
- 125000002837 carbocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 17
- 208000015181 infectious disease Diseases 0.000 description 17
- 239000000816 peptidomimetic Substances 0.000 description 16
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 15
- 108010043958 Peptoids Proteins 0.000 description 14
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 14
- 125000005842 heteroatom Chemical group 0.000 description 14
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 14
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 14
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 14
- 0 [1*]N(CC(=O)N[C@@H]([2*])C(=O)C(C)C)C(C)C.[1*][C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H]([2*])C(=O)C(C)C)N(C)C(C)C Chemical compound [1*]N(CC(=O)N[C@@H]([2*])C(=O)C(C)C)C(C)C.[1*][C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H]([2*])C(=O)C(C)C)N(C)C(C)C 0.000 description 13
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 13
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Diethyl ether Chemical compound CCOCC RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- VLKZOEOYAKHREP-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-Hexane Chemical compound CCCCCC VLKZOEOYAKHREP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 238000004007 reversed phase HPLC Methods 0.000 description 12
- 150000008574 D-amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 11
- 101100166423 Mus musculus Ccdc47 gene Proteins 0.000 description 11
- 102100027343 Napsin-A Human genes 0.000 description 11
- BXRNXXXXHLBUKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N piperazine-2,5-dione Chemical compound O=C1CNC(=O)CN1 BXRNXXXXHLBUKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 11
- 150000007970 thio esters Chemical class 0.000 description 11
- 238000002965 ELISA Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000005556 structure-activity relationship Methods 0.000 description 10
- 101100205180 Neurospora crassa (strain ATCC 24698 / 74-OR23-1A / CBS 708.71 / DSM 1257 / FGSC 987) leu-6 gene Proteins 0.000 description 9
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 9
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 9
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical group [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 108010016626 Dipeptides Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 101100386053 Neurospora crassa (strain ATCC 24698 / 74-OR23-1A / CBS 708.71 / DSM 1257 / FGSC 987) cys-3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 8
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 8
- 238000003776 cleavage reaction Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000000651 prodrug Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229940002612 prodrug Drugs 0.000 description 8
- 230000007017 scission Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 8
- 206010040070 Septic Shock Diseases 0.000 description 7
- 206010044248 Toxic shock syndrome Diseases 0.000 description 7
- 231100000650 Toxic shock syndrome Toxicity 0.000 description 7
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000005710 macrocyclization reaction Methods 0.000 description 7
- 229920000136 polysorbate Polymers 0.000 description 7
- 239000011550 stock solution Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000006228 supernatant Substances 0.000 description 7
- UGNWTBMOAKPKBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrachloro-1,4-benzoquinone Chemical compound ClC1=C(Cl)C(=O)C(Cl)=C(Cl)C1=O UGNWTBMOAKPKBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 239000001974 tryptic soy broth Substances 0.000 description 7
- 108010050327 trypticase-soy broth Proteins 0.000 description 7
- WFDIJRYMOXRFFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetic anhydride Chemical compound CC(=O)OC(C)=O WFDIJRYMOXRFFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical group N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 108010069514 Cyclic Peptides Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 102000001189 Cyclic Peptides Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 229940124639 Selective inhibitor Drugs 0.000 description 6
- 230000008484 agonism Effects 0.000 description 6
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 6
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 description 6
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 6
- DNJIEGIFACGWOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethanethiol Chemical compound CCS DNJIEGIFACGWOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 6
- 238000010189 synthetic method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000003053 toxin Substances 0.000 description 6
- 231100000765 toxin Toxicity 0.000 description 6
- 108700012359 toxins Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 125000003088 (fluoren-9-ylmethoxy)carbonyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 241000766754 Agra Species 0.000 description 5
- 108090000204 Dipeptidase 1 Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 241000283973 Oryctolagus cuniculus Species 0.000 description 5
- 108091030066 RNAIII Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 238000002835 absorbance Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000005557 antagonist Substances 0.000 description 5
- 102000006635 beta-lactamase Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 235000018417 cysteine Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- XUJNEKJLAYXESH-UHFFFAOYSA-N cysteine Natural products SCC(N)C(O)=O XUJNEKJLAYXESH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000010790 dilution Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000012895 dilution Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 210000003743 erythrocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- WBJINCZRORDGAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl formate Chemical compound CCOC=O WBJINCZRORDGAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 125000001165 hydrophobic group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000000155 isotopic effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000007363 ring formation reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 125000006413 ring segment Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 5
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- VHYFNPMBLIVWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-Dimethylaminopyridine Chemical compound CN(C)C1=CC=NC=C1 VHYFNPMBLIVWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycine Chemical compound NCC(O)=O DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrochloric acid Chemical compound Cl VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 102220580228 Non-receptor tyrosine-protein kinase TYK2_L6A_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 4
- NQRYJNQNLNOLGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Piperidine Chemical compound C1CCNCC1 NQRYJNQNLNOLGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000004480 active ingredient Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000001270 agonistic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 125000003282 alkyl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000032770 biofilm formation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 4
- 125000004663 dialkyl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 231100000673 dose–response relationship Toxicity 0.000 description 4
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 4
- 235000019198 oils Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 4
- 125000004430 oxygen atom Chemical group O* 0.000 description 4
- 238000010647 peptide synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000012071 phase Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000008363 phosphate buffer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 4
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 238000013207 serial dilution Methods 0.000 description 4
- 150000003384 small molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 238000010532 solid phase synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000007858 starting material Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 4
- 125000004169 (C1-C6) alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- QZBUWPVZSXDWSB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-benzyl-2,3,6,7,8,8a-hexahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]pyrazine-1,4-dione Chemical compound O=C1N2CCCC2C(=O)NC1CC1=CC=CC=C1 QZBUWPVZSXDWSB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- HBAQYPYDRFILMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 8-[3-(1-cyclopropylpyrazol-4-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-5-yl]-3-methyl-3,8-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octan-2-one Chemical class C1(CC1)N1N=CC(=C1)C1=NNC2=C1N=C(N=C2)N1C2C(N(CC1CC2)C)=O HBAQYPYDRFILMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetic acid Chemical compound CC(O)=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 208000035473 Communicable disease Diseases 0.000 description 3
- LSGOTAXPWMCUCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cyclo(Tyr-Pro) Chemical compound C1=CC(O)=CC=C1CC1C(=O)N2CCCC2C(=O)N1 LSGOTAXPWMCUCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000012286 ELISA Assay Methods 0.000 description 3
- 108010006464 Hemolysin Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 3
- CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen bromide Chemical class Br CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N L-tyrosine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical compound [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Toluene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1 YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 125000002777 acetyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 3
- 239000000556 agonist Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000002924 anti-infective effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 3
- 125000002619 bicyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 238000004166 bioassay Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000003115 biocidal effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 3
- 108010038252 cyclo(phenylalanyl-prolyl) Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 108010073868 cyclo(tyrosyl-prolyl) Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 125000000753 cycloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 238000010511 deprotection reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000002552 dosage form Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000000839 emulsion Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 3
- 125000001153 fluoro group Chemical group F* 0.000 description 3
- PJJJBBJSCAKJQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N guanidinium chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].NC(N)=[NH2+] PJJJBBJSCAKJQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000003228 hemolysin Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000004128 high performance liquid chromatography Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000012678 infectious agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000004615 ingredient Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 150000002678 macrocyclic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000007069 methylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 125000001624 naphthyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 125000004433 nitrogen atom Chemical group N* 0.000 description 3
- QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen group Chemical group [N] QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000002674 ointment Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000006186 oral dosage form Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000007911 parenteral administration Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000035699 permeability Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000013612 plasmid Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000746 purification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000003571 reporter gene assay Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012216 screening Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000011593 sulfur Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000000999 tert-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 3
- 239000003981 vehicle Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000007923 virulence factor Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000000304 virulence factor Substances 0.000 description 3
- BUJQSIPFDWLNDC-FQEVSTJZSA-N (2s)-2-[9h-fluoren-9-ylmethoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]-4-methylpentanoic acid Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(COC(=O)N(C)[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(O)=O)C3=CC=CC=C3C2=C1 BUJQSIPFDWLNDC-FQEVSTJZSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7553-56-2 Chemical group [I] ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IKHGUXGNUITLKF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetaldehyde Chemical compound CC=O IKHGUXGNUITLKF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YZCKVEUIGOORGS-OUBTZVSYSA-N Deuterium Chemical compound [2H] YZCKVEUIGOORGS-OUBTZVSYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004471 Glycine Substances 0.000 description 2
- AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanesulfonic acid Chemical compound CS(O)(=O)=O AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000000729 N-terminal amino-acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 235000019502 Orange oil Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 2
- CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sodium Carbonate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]C([O-])=O CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- PXIPVTKHYLBLMZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sodium azide Chemical compound [Na+].[N-]=[N+]=[N-] PXIPVTKHYLBLMZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfuric acid Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- DPXJVFZANSGRMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid;2,3,4,5,6-pentahydroxyhexanal;sodium Chemical compound [Na].CC(O)=O.OCC(O)C(O)C(O)C(O)C=O DPXJVFZANSGRMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013019 agitation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000001298 alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000002877 alkyl aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000008860 allosteric change Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000001408 amides Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000003042 antagnostic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008485 antagonism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000003710 aryl alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 150000001649 bromium compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000001246 bromo group Chemical group Br* 0.000 description 2
- 125000002915 carbonyl group Chemical group [*:2]C([*:1])=O 0.000 description 2
- 239000001768 carboxy methyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 210000000170 cell membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 235000010980 cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- MYPYJXKWCTUITO-KIIOPKALSA-N chembl3301825 Chemical compound O([C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1OC1=C2C=C3C=C1OC1=CC=C(C=C1Cl)[C@@H](O)[C@H](C(N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@H]3C(=O)N[C@H]1C(=O)N[C@H](C(N[C@H](C3=CC(O)=CC(O)=C3C=3C(O)=CC=C1C=3)C(O)=O)=O)[C@H](O)C1=CC=C(C(=C1)Cl)O2)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](CC(C)C)NC)[C@H]1C[C@](C)(N)C(O)[C@H](C)O1 MYPYJXKWCTUITO-KIIOPKALSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000001309 chloro group Chemical group Cl* 0.000 description 2
- 230000002860 competitive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000006071 cream Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000002993 cycloalkylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000004956 cyclohexylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052805 deuterium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000009509 drug development Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007876 drug discovery Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000012636 effector Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000706 filtrate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000796 flavoring agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000013355 food flavoring agent Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 125000002541 furyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001727 in vivo Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000001041 indolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000006698 induction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001990 intravenous administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000004694 iodide salts Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium stearate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 238000004949 mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000000250 methylamino group Chemical class [H]N(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- 239000010502 orange oil Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 244000052769 pathogen Species 0.000 description 2
- 230000001717 pathogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000037361 pathway Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000008188 pellet Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003208 petroleum Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000546 pharmaceutical excipient Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000144 pharmacologic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000003755 preservative agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000006239 protecting group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007086 side reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 2
- 235000019812 sodium carboxymethyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229920001027 sodium carboxymethylcellulose Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000007790 solid phase Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000008174 sterile solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000375 suspending agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000006188 syrup Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000020357 syrup Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000002560 therapeutic procedure Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000003944 tolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000000699 topical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013518 transcription Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000035897 transcription Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000006168 tricyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- LZMSXDHGHZKXJD-VJANTYMQSA-N trypanothione disulfide Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCC(=O)N[C@H]1CSSC[C@H](NC(=O)CC[C@H](N)C(O)=O)C(=O)NCC(=O)NCCCNCCCCNC(=O)CNC1=O LZMSXDHGHZKXJD-VJANTYMQSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 2
- LSPHULWDVZXLIL-UHFFFAOYSA-N (+/-)-Camphoric acid Chemical class CC1(C)C(C(O)=O)CCC1(C)C(O)=O LSPHULWDVZXLIL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LHNIIDJCEODSHA-OQRUQETBSA-N (6r,7r)-3-[(e)-2-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)ethenyl]-8-oxo-7-[(2-thiophen-2-ylacetyl)amino]-5-thia-1-azabicyclo[4.2.0]oct-2-ene-2-carboxylic acid Chemical compound N([C@H]1[C@H]2SCC(=C(N2C1=O)C(=O)O)\C=C\C=1C(=CC(=CC=1)[N+]([O-])=O)[N+]([O-])=O)C(=O)CC1=CC=CS1 LHNIIDJCEODSHA-OQRUQETBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000006727 (C1-C6) alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004209 (C1-C8) alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- BDNKZNFMNDZQMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-diisopropylcarbodiimide Chemical compound CC(C)N=C=NC(C)C BDNKZNFMNDZQMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VFWCMGCRMGJXDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-chlorobutane Chemical class CCCCCl VFWCMGCRMGJXDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VUQPJRPDRDVQMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-chlorooctadecane Chemical class CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCl VUQPJRPDRDVQMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WCOCCXZFEJGHTC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-(bromomethyl)phenyl]acetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC1=CC=C(CBr)C=C1 WCOCCXZFEJGHTC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WMPPDTMATNBGJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-phenylethylbromide Chemical class BrCCC1=CC=CC=C1 WMPPDTMATNBGJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004179 3-chlorophenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(*)=C([H])C(Cl)=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- ZRPLANDPDWYOMZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-cyclopentylpropionic acid Chemical class OC(=O)CCC1CCCC1 ZRPLANDPDWYOMZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PCDWFBFHIIKIPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-ethyl-2h-1,3-benzothiazole-2-sulfonic acid Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N(CC)C(S(O)(=O)=O)SC2=C1 PCDWFBFHIIKIPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004180 3-fluorophenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(*)=C([H])C(F)=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- OROGUZVNAFJPHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-hydroxy-2,4-dimethyl-2H-thiophen-5-one Chemical compound CC1SC(=O)C(C)=C1O OROGUZVNAFJPHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XMIIGOLPHOKFCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-phenylpropionic acid Chemical class OC(=O)CCC1=CC=CC=C1 XMIIGOLPHOKFCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000549 4-dimethylaminophenol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000001255 4-fluorophenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(*)=C([H])C([H])=C1F 0.000 description 1
- HIQIXEFWDLTDED-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-hydroxy-1-piperidin-4-ylpyrrolidin-2-one Chemical compound O=C1CC(O)CN1C1CCNCC1 HIQIXEFWDLTDED-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004172 4-methoxyphenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(OC([H])([H])[H])=C([H])C([H])=C1* 0.000 description 1
- ZVEWFTICTSQBDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methylphenol Chemical group [CH2]C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 ZVEWFTICTSQBDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000590 4-methylphenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(=C([H])C([H])=C1*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-XLOQQCSPSA-N Alpha-Lactose Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](CO)O[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-XLOQQCSPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004475 Arginine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 206010053555 Arthritis bacterial Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 102100021257 Beta-secretase 1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710150192 Beta-secretase 1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091003079 Bovine Serum Albumin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 125000001433 C-terminal amino-acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- SINCHZMVQJWPDC-WNAUHJOHSA-N CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCCCCCCCNC1=O.CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCCCCNC1=O.CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCCNC1=O.CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCNC1=O Chemical compound CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCCCCCCCNC1=O.CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCCCCNC1=O.CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCCNC1=O.CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCNC1=O SINCHZMVQJWPDC-WNAUHJOHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SWERDQVNVMXWOV-ZNZIZOMTSA-N CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCCCCCCNC1=O Chemical compound CC(=O)C[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)CC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)CCCCCCCNC1=O SWERDQVNVMXWOV-ZNZIZOMTSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QAOILFZLKHORKF-PBIAMFHGSA-N CCC(C)[C@H](N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(=O)O)NC1=O Chemical compound CCC(C)[C@H](N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@H]1CSC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(=O)O)NC1=O QAOILFZLKHORKF-PBIAMFHGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KHVYRFVCRHUDIV-MNPSBHMBSA-N CC[C@@H](C)C1NC(=O)CN(CC(=O)N[C@H]2CSC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC3=CC=CC=C3)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(=O)O)CC2=O)C1=O Chemical compound CC[C@@H](C)C1NC(=O)CN(CC(=O)N[C@H]2CSC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC3=CC=CC=C3)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(=O)O)CC2=O)C1=O KHVYRFVCRHUDIV-MNPSBHMBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IOIXQYBEGXEBIV-XYNXPQAZSA-N CC[C@H](C)[C@@H]1NC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(C)=O)CSC(=O)[C@H](CCSC)NC1=O Chemical compound CC[C@H](C)[C@@H]1NC(=O)[C@H](CC2=CC=CC=C2)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(C)=O)CSC(=O)[C@H](CCSC)NC1=O IOIXQYBEGXEBIV-XYNXPQAZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010011409 Cross infection Diseases 0.000 description 1
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N D-OH-Asp Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC(O)=O CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-UWTATZPHSA-N D-aspartic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H](N)CC(O)=O CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-UWTATZPHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920001353 Dextrin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004375 Dextrin Substances 0.000 description 1
- XBPCUCUWBYBCDP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dicyclohexylamine Chemical class C1CCCCC1NC1CCCCC1 XBPCUCUWBYBCDP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010013142 Disinhibition Diseases 0.000 description 1
- LVGKNOAMLMIIKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Elaidinsaeure-aethylester Natural products CCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC LVGKNOAMLMIIKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000005593 Endopeptidases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010059378 Endopeptidases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylenediamine Chemical compound NCCN PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010010803 Gelatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000007821 HATU Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010072039 Histidine kinase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000035473 Histidine kinase domains Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091010875 Histidine kinase domains Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010001336 Horseradish Peroxidase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M Ilexoside XXIX Chemical compound C[C@@H]1CC[C@@]2(CC[C@@]3(C(=CC[C@H]4[C@]3(CC[C@@H]5[C@@]4(CC[C@@H](C5(C)C)OS(=O)(=O)[O-])C)C)[C@@H]2[C@]1(C)O)C)C(=O)O[C@H]6[C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H]([C@H](O6)CO)O)O)O.[Na+] DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 208000004575 Infectious Arthritis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N L-aspartic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(O)=O CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000186604 Lactobacillus reuteri Species 0.000 description 1
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N Lactose Natural products OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O[C@H]2[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)O[C@@H]2CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004166 Lanolin Substances 0.000 description 1
- WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium Chemical compound [Li] WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lysine Natural products NCCCCC(N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004472 Lysine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010052285 Membrane Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000018697 Membrane Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- RJQXTJLFIWVMTO-TYNCELHUSA-N Methicillin Chemical compound COC1=CC=CC(OC)=C1C(=O)N[C@@H]1C(=O)N2[C@@H](C(O)=O)C(C)(C)S[C@@H]21 RJQXTJLFIWVMTO-TYNCELHUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007126 N-alkylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- MBBZMMPHUWSWHV-BDVNFPICSA-N N-methylglucamine Chemical class CNC[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)CO MBBZMMPHUWSWHV-BDVNFPICSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010049175 N-substituted Glycines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 108091007491 NSP3 Papain-like protease domains Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010031252 Osteomyelitis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 208000037581 Persistent Infection Diseases 0.000 description 1
- YTILBRIUASDGBL-BZSNNMDCSA-N Phe-Leu-Leu Chemical compound CC(C)C[C@@H](C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 YTILBRIUASDGBL-BZSNNMDCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920001213 Polysorbate 20 Polymers 0.000 description 1
- ONIBWKKTOPOVIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Proline Natural products OC(=O)C1CCCN1 ONIBWKKTOPOVIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propanedioic acid Natural products OC(=O)CC(O)=O OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XBDQKXXYIPTUBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propionic acid Chemical class CCC(O)=O XBDQKXXYIPTUBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229920002472 Starch Polymers 0.000 description 1
- YZCKVEUIGOORGS-NJFSPNSNSA-N Tritium Chemical compound [3H] YZCKVEUIGOORGS-NJFSPNSNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010059993 Vancomycin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000370 acceptor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001242 acetic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000002378 acidificating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012190 activator Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001154 acute effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- WNLRTRBMVRJNCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N adipic acid Chemical class OC(=O)CCCCC(O)=O WNLRTRBMVRJNCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012382 advanced drug delivery Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000443 aerosol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003295 alanine group Chemical group N[C@@H](C)C(=O)* 0.000 description 1
- 150000001295 alanines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000010443 alginic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920000615 alginic acid Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052783 alkali metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001447 alkali salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052784 alkaline earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001350 alkyl halides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005213 alkyl heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000003281 allosteric effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000000539 amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004202 aminomethyl group Chemical group [H]N([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 150000003863 ammonium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001450 anions Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000000844 anti-bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N arginine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCCNC(N)=N ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005110 aryl thio group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004104 aryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000010323 ascorbic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000003289 ascorbyl group Chemical class [H]O[C@@]([H])(C([H])([H])O*)[C@@]1([H])OC(=O)C(O*)=C1O* 0.000 description 1
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-L aspartate group Chemical class N[C@@H](CC(=O)[O-])C(=O)[O-] CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 235000003704 aspartic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- OHDRQQURAXLVGJ-HLVWOLMTSA-N azane;(2e)-3-ethyl-2-[(e)-(3-ethyl-6-sulfo-1,3-benzothiazol-2-ylidene)hydrazinylidene]-1,3-benzothiazole-6-sulfonic acid Chemical compound [NH4+].[NH4+].S/1C2=CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)=CC=C2N(CC)C\1=N/N=C1/SC2=CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)=CC=C2N1CC OHDRQQURAXLVGJ-HLVWOLMTSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000852 azido group Chemical group *N=[N+]=[N-] 0.000 description 1
- 244000052616 bacterial pathogen Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- SRSXLGNVWSONIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzenesulfonic acid Chemical class OS(=O)(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 SRSXLGNVWSONIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001558 benzoic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003236 benzoyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 125000000051 benzyloxy group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])O* 0.000 description 1
- OQFSQFPPLPISGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-carboxyaspartic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)C(C(O)=O)C(O)=O OQFSQFPPLPISGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011953 bioanalysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002306 biochemical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000029918 bioluminescence Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005415 bioluminescence Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000006267 biphenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-M bisulphate group Chemical group S([O-])(O)(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 210000000601 blood cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001642 boronic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940098773 bovine serum albumin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 150000004648 butanoic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 210000004899 c-terminal region Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000001506 calcium phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000389 calcium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000011010 calcium phosphates Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- MIOPJNTWMNEORI-UHFFFAOYSA-N camphorsulfonic acid Chemical class C1CC2(CS(O)(=O)=O)C(=O)CC1C2(C)C MIOPJNTWMNEORI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002775 capsule Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001718 carbodiimides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001721 carbon Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 150000001768 cations Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000006037 cell lysis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005119 centrifugation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012512 characterization method Methods 0.000 description 1
- PBAYDYUZOSNJGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N chelidonic acid Natural products OC(=O)C1=CC(=O)C=C(C(O)=O)O1 PBAYDYUZOSNJGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000013043 chemical agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003636 chemical group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000068 chlorophenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001860 citric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003271 compound fluorescence assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000021615 conjugation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001577 copolymer Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000012228 culture supernatant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000000392 cycloalkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000596 cyclohexenyl group Chemical group C1(=CCCCC1)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000001559 cyclopropyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C1([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 230000002498 deadly effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000002704 decyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 230000008260 defense mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000019425 dextrin Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000008050 dialkyl sulfates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004177 diethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 239000003085 diluting agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000000118 dimethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 230000003292 diminished effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- GAFRWLVTHPVQGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N dipentyl sulfate Chemical class CCCCCOS(=O)(=O)OCCCCC GAFRWLVTHPVQGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 231100000676 disease causative agent Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000003438 dodecyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- MOTZDAYCYVMXPC-UHFFFAOYSA-N dodecyl hydrogen sulfate Chemical class CCCCCCCCCCCCOS(O)(=O)=O MOTZDAYCYVMXPC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000009510 drug design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003028 elevating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003995 emulsifying agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 206010014665 endocarditis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- CCIVGXIOQKPBKL-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethanesulfonic acid Chemical class CCS(O)(=O)=O CCIVGXIOQKPBKL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LVGKNOAMLMIIKO-QXMHVHEDSA-N ethyl oleate Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OCC LVGKNOAMLMIIKO-QXMHVHEDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940093471 ethyl oleate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000017188 evasion or tolerance of host immune response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000029142 excretion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000945 filler Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012467 final product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000001207 fluorophenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000003599 food sweetener Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000002485 formyl group Chemical group [H]C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 238000001640 fractional crystallisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-OWOJBTEDSA-L fumarate(2-) Chemical class [O-]C(=O)\C=C\C([O-])=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-OWOJBTEDSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 230000004927 fusion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008273 gelatin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000159 gelatin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000019322 gelatine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000011852 gelatine desserts Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000002315 glycerophosphates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000002332 glycine derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000002334 glycols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000008187 granular material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003278 haem Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000004820 halides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000008282 halocarbons Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000036541 health Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009083 hemolysis by symbiont of host erythrocytes Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002949 hemolytic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- MNWFXJYAOYHMED-UHFFFAOYSA-N heptanoic acid Chemical class CCCCCCC(O)=O MNWFXJYAOYHMED-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004446 heteroarylalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005553 heteroaryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- FUZZWVXGSFPDMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexanoic acid Chemical class CCCCCC(O)=O FUZZWVXGSFPDMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004051 hexyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 244000052637 human pathogen Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000036571 hydration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006703 hydration reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003840 hydrochlorides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910000042 hydrogen bromide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XMBWDFGMSWQBCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydrogen iodide Chemical class I XMBWDFGMSWQBCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011065 in-situ storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001802 infusion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009413 insulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003834 intracellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007918 intramuscular administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007927 intramuscular injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007912 intraperitoneal administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007928 intraperitoneal injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006207 intravenous dosage form Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011835 investigation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003456 ion exchange resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003303 ion-exchange polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- SUMDYPCJJOFFON-UHFFFAOYSA-N isethionic acid Chemical class OCCS(O)(=O)=O SUMDYPCJJOFFON-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001449 isopropyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 150000003893 lactate salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940001882 lactobacillus reuteri Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000008101 lactose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940039717 lanolin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019388 lanolin Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000012417 linear regression Methods 0.000 description 1
- TYZROVQLWOKYKF-ZDUSSCGKSA-N linezolid Chemical compound O=C1O[C@@H](CNC(=O)C)CN1C(C=C1F)=CC=C1N1CCOCC1 TYZROVQLWOKYKF-ZDUSSCGKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003907 linezolid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910052744 lithium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000314 lubricant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002521 macromolecule Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 159000000003 magnesium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000019359 magnesium stearate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UPHRSURJSA-N maleic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C/C(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UPHRSURJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011976 maleic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002688 maleic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001840 matrix-assisted laser desorption--ionisation time-of-flight mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002175 menstrual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002503 metabolic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004060 metabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-M methanesulfonate group Chemical class CS(=O)(=O)[O-] AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229940098779 methanesulfonic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229920000609 methyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000001923 methylcellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010981 methylcellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960003085 meticillin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002480 mineral oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010446 mineral oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000002808 molecular sieve Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002757 morpholinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000001421 myristyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000004108 n-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000001280 n-hexyl group Chemical group C(CCCCC)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000000740 n-pentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000004123 n-propyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- KVBGVZZKJNLNJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid Chemical class C1=CC=CC2=CC(S(=O)(=O)O)=CC=C21 KVBGVZZKJNLNJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000013642 negative control Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000006386 neutralization reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002814 niacins Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000001968 nicotinic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000002823 nitrates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 231100000252 nontoxic Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000003000 nontoxic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940127249 oral antibiotic Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000007530 organic bases Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- UWYHMGVUTGAWSP-JKIFEVAISA-N oxacillin Chemical compound N([C@@H]1C(N2[C@H](C(C)(C)S[C@@H]21)C(O)=O)=O)C(=O)C1=C(C)ON=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 UWYHMGVUTGAWSP-JKIFEVAISA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001019 oxacillin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000003891 oxalate salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003431 oxalo group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000160 oxazolidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005968 oxazolinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002971 oxazolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000003854 p-chlorophenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(*)=C([H])C([H])=C1Cl 0.000 description 1
- 239000004031 partial agonist Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006072 paste Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019371 penicillin G benzathine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000007030 peptide scission Effects 0.000 description 1
- JRKICGRDRMAZLK-UHFFFAOYSA-L persulfate group Chemical group S(=O)(=O)([O-])OOS(=O)(=O)[O-] JRKICGRDRMAZLK-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 125000000843 phenylene group Chemical group C1(=C(C=CC=C1)*)* 0.000 description 1
- 235000021317 phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000003013 phosphoric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OXNIZHLAWKMVMX-UHFFFAOYSA-N picric acid Chemical class OC1=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C1[N+]([O-])=O OXNIZHLAWKMVMX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000006187 pill Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000004193 piperazinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005936 piperidyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004591 piperonyl group Chemical group C(C1=CC=2OCOC2C=C1)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000005547 pivalate group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000000256 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010486 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005990 polystyrene resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006316 polyvinylpyrrolidine Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000013641 positive control Substances 0.000 description 1
- 159000000001 potassium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000002335 preservative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003141 primary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000001500 prolyl group Chemical group [H]N1C([H])(C(=O)[*])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 239000003380 propellant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000001501 propionyl group Chemical group O=C([*])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000001436 propyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000000561 purinyl group Chemical group N1=C(N=C2N=CNC2=C1)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000003373 pyrazinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004076 pyridyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000714 pyrimidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000719 pyrrolidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000001422 pyrrolinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000168 pyrrolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000010791 quenching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000002943 quinolinyl group Chemical group N1=C(C=CC2=CC=CC=C12)* 0.000 description 1
- 230000035484 reaction time Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108091006082 receptor inhibitors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 150000003873 salicylate salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229930195734 saturated hydrocarbon Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000003335 secondary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000028327 secretion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 201000001223 septic arthritis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000002966 serum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 206010040872 skin infection Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000011734 sodium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052708 sodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- URGAHOPLAPQHLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N sodium aluminosilicate Chemical compound [Na+].[Al+3].[O-][Si]([O-])=O.[O-][Si]([O-])=O URGAHOPLAPQHLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000029 sodium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012064 sodium phosphate buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012453 solvate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007614 solvation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000028070 sporulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003381 stabilizer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008107 starch Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019698 starch Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007929 subcutaneous injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010254 subcutaneous injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003890 succinate salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000005846 sugar alcohols Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000008163 sugars Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000003871 sulfonates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004434 sulfur atom Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000003467 sulfuric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000013595 supernatant sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000829 suppository Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004083 survival effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013268 sustained release Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012730 sustained-release form Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003765 sweetening agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000011580 syndromic disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000009897 systematic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009885 systemic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003826 tablet Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000454 talc Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052623 talc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000012222 talc Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000004885 tandem mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003892 tartrate salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000010998 test method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002562 thickening agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000001544 thienyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002813 thiocarbonyl group Chemical group *C(*)=S 0.000 description 1
- 150000003567 thiocyanates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- LBLYYCQCTBFVLH-UHFFFAOYSA-M toluenesulfonate group Chemical group C=1(C(=CC=CC1)S(=O)(=O)[O-])C LBLYYCQCTBFVLH-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 238000011200 topical administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000005490 tosylate group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000006257 total synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-butenedioic acid Natural products OC(=O)C=CC(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004306 triazinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000001425 triazolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H tricalcium bis(phosphate) Chemical compound [Ca+2].[Ca+2].[Ca+2].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O.[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H 0.000 description 1
- 125000002023 trifluoromethyl group Chemical group FC(F)(F)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000004953 trihalomethyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229910052722 tritium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N tyrosine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000000825 ultraviolet detection Methods 0.000 description 1
- ZDPHROOEEOARMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N undecanoic acid Chemical class CCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O ZDPHROOEEOARMN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MYPYJXKWCTUITO-LYRMYLQWSA-N vancomycin Chemical compound O([C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1OC1=C2C=C3C=C1OC1=CC=C(C=C1Cl)[C@@H](O)[C@H](C(N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@H]3C(=O)N[C@H]1C(=O)N[C@H](C(N[C@@H](C3=CC(O)=CC(O)=C3C=3C(O)=CC=C1C=3)C(O)=O)=O)[C@H](O)C1=CC=C(C(=C1)Cl)O2)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](CC(C)C)NC)[C@H]1C[C@](C)(N)[C@H](O)[C@H](C)O1 MYPYJXKWCTUITO-LYRMYLQWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003165 vancomycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- MYPYJXKWCTUITO-UHFFFAOYSA-N vancomycin Natural products O1C(C(=C2)Cl)=CC=C2C(O)C(C(NC(C2=CC(O)=CC(O)=C2C=2C(O)=CC=C3C=2)C(O)=O)=O)NC(=O)C3NC(=O)C2NC(=O)C(CC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC)C(O)C(C=C3Cl)=CC=C3OC3=CC2=CC1=C3OC1OC(CO)C(O)C(O)C1OC1CC(C)(N)C(O)C(C)O1 MYPYJXKWCTUITO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003643 water by type Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001993 wax Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K7/00—Peptides having 5 to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- C07K7/50—Cyclic peptides containing at least one abnormal peptide link
- C07K7/54—Cyclic peptides containing at least one abnormal peptide link with at least one abnormal peptide link in the ring
- C07K7/56—Cyclic peptides containing at least one abnormal peptide link with at least one abnormal peptide link in the ring the cyclisation not occurring through 2,4-diamino-butanoic acid
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
- A61K38/04—Peptides having up to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- A61K38/12—Cyclic peptides, e.g. bacitracins; Polymyxins; Gramicidins S, C; Tyrocidins A, B or C
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- C07K5/02—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing at least one abnormal peptide link
- C07K5/0202—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing at least one abnormal peptide link containing the structure -NH-X-X-C(=0)-, X being an optionally substituted carbon atom or a heteroatom, e.g. beta-amino acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- C07K5/02—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing at least one abnormal peptide link
- C07K5/0205—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing at least one abnormal peptide link containing the structure -NH-(X)3-C(=0)-, e.g. statine or derivatives thereof
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- C07K5/02—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing at least one abnormal peptide link
- C07K5/021—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing at least one abnormal peptide link containing the structure -NH-(X)n-C(=0)-, n being 5 or 6; for n > 6, classification in C07K5/06 - C07K5/10, according to the moiety having normal peptide bonds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
- C07K5/10—Tetrapeptides
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
- C07K5/12—Cyclic peptides with only normal peptide bonds in the ring
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K7/00—Peptides having 5 to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- C07K7/64—Cyclic peptides containing only normal peptide links
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N1/00—Microorganisms, e.g. protozoa; Compositions thereof; Processes of propagating, maintaining or preserving microorganisms or compositions thereof; Processes of preparing or isolating a composition containing a microorganism; Culture media therefor
- C12N1/36—Adaptation or attenuation of cells
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
Definitions
- quorum sensing Many bacteria utilize small molecule or peptidic signals to assess their local population densities in a process termed quorum sensing (QS). [1-3] This chemical signaling process effectively allows bacteria to “count” themselves and behave as a group at high cell number. While the specifics may vary between species, QS circuits share general organizing principles: bacteria produce, secrete, and detect signal molecules referred to as autoinducers. At high population densities in a given environment, the autoinducers will reach a sufficiently high concentration to bind and activate their cognate (intracellular or extracellular) receptors. Signal:receptor binding then alters the expression of genes involved in bacterial group behaviors, such as swarming, sporulation, bioluminescence, conjugation, biofilm formation, and virulence factor production.
- QS quorum sensing
- QS antagonists provide an alternative anti-infective therapy that does not place selective pressure on the bacterial population to develop resistance.[13,14] This is especially important in the case of S. aureus , which rapidly develops resistance to antibiotics, including resistance to the once last-resort antibiotic vancomycin.[15]
- S. aureus is a Gram-positive bacterium that uses QS to establish both acute and chronic infections.[16,17] This pathogen produces an impressive arsenal of virulence factors, including tissue-degrading enzymes, immune evasion factors, and pore-forming toxins (hemolysins), all of which are regulated by the accessory gene regulator (agr) QS system.[18-20]
- the agr system has four components, termed AgrA-D, as illustrated in FIG. 1A , and is centered on the autoinducing peptide (AIP) QS signal.
- AgrB is an integral membrane endopeptidase that converts the precursor of the AIP signal, AgrD, to the mature AIP.
- This conversion involves cyclization of AgrD via a cysteine sulfhydryl group and its C-terminus to form the AIP as a 16-atom thiolactone macrocycle with an N-terminal exocyclic tail (shown in FIG. 1B ).
- AgrB is also involved in the secretion of AIP across the cell membrane.
- the AIP ligand binds to its target receptor AgrC, a transmembrane histidine kinase.
- the AIP:AgrC complex acts to phosphorylate the response regulator, AgrA.
- RNAIII thus represents the main effector of the agr system and regulates the expression of many virulence factors and surface proteins associated with biofilm production.
- group-I and -II are associated with the majority of invasive infections,[26-28] while group-IV is considered rare and limited to exfoliative toxin-related syndromes.
- Group-III S. aureus has recently been reported to be the most abundant group in nasal carriage cases and to be predominately responsible for toxic shock syndrome (TSS) in humans.[26,27] Toxic shock syndrome toxin-1 (TSST-1) is the causative agent all cases of menstrual TSS and most cases of nonmenstrual TSS.[26,29] Notably, TSST-1 production is directly regulated by the agr-III QS system ( FIG. 1A ).[18,29,30] Methods to inhibit the agr-III system in S. aureus could provide new insights into and therapeutic strategies for this deadly disease.
- AIP-II macrocycle was reported to be important for recognition because linear native peptides and mimetics of AIP-II were completely inactive.[45] In addition, these studies reported that the two structural elements of AIPs, the macrocycle and the exocyclic tail, are responsible for AgrC:AIP recognition and AgrC activation, respectively. [55] Interactions of AIPs with non-cognate AgrC receptors were reported to be inhibitory, namely through AIP:AgrC recognition, alterations to the exocyclic tails did not significantly affect cross-inhibition. The AIP macrocycle alone is reported sufficient for cross-group inhibitory activity.
- Peptidomimetics are a powerful tool for studying and understanding SARs of peptides and proteins.
- Modifications can be introduced to gather information regarding the importance of specific amide and hydrogen bonds within a peptide backbone and to identify conformational restrictions and structural elements important to overall activity while simultaneously enhancing pharmacological properties.
- Peptidomimetics with enhanced metabolic stability and permeability, can be useful as drug leads.
- N-methyl amino acids and N-substituted glycine derivatives can be inserted into or formed into peptides generating fully or partially N-methylated peptides, peptoids or peptide-peptoid (peptomer) hybrids which can be used to provide valuable SAR insights.
- Muir and co-workers [51] performed a N-methyl scan of the truncated version of AIP-II pointing to the utility of such studies for AIP SAR.
- Molecules which affect QS in group-III S. aureus are of particular interest because of the prevalence of infections of these group-III species in human TSS.
- This invention provides compounds that are useful for bacterial interference.
- the invention provides compounds that are useful in the treatment of bacterial infection and related conditions. More specifically the invention provides compounds that are useful in the treatment of “staph” infections (infections caused by Staphylococcus bacteria) and particularly infections of Staphylococcus aureus.
- the invention provides compounds that affect quorum sensing (QS) in Staphylococcus aureus and related Staphylococcus species (e.g., S. epidermidis ). More specifically the invention provides compounds which modulate one or more of the four AgrC receptors of Staphylococcus species, particularly of Staphylococcus aureus . Modulation includes inhibition or activation of one or more of these four AgrC receptors.
- QS quorum sensing
- the invention provides compounds which inhibit one or more of the four AgrC receptors of Staphylococcus species, particularly of Staphylococcus aureus .
- compounds which inhibit three or four of the AgrC receptors are provided.
- compounds which inhibit all four of the AgrC receptors are provided.
- compounds which inhibit all four of the AgrC receptors with picomolar IC 50 values are provided.
- the invention provides compounds which activate one or more of the four AgrC receptors of Staphylococcus species, particularly of Staphylococcus aureus .
- the invention provides compounds which activate AgrC-III.
- Certain compounds of the invention block hemolysis by wild-type Staphylococcus aureus , which is a virulence phenotype under the control of QS. Certain compounds of the invention block hemolysis by wild-type Staphylococcus aureus at picomolar levels. Certain compounds of the invention reduce TSST-1 production levels in a wild-type Staphylococcus aureus group-III strain. Certain compounds of the invention reduce TSST-1 production levels in a wild-type Staphylococcus aureus group-III strain by over 80%.
- compounds of the invention are useful for the treatment of infections involving Staphylococcus aureus group-III strains and particularly for the treatment of Toxic shock syndrome.
- compounds of the invention modulate biofilm formation by Staphylococcus species, particularly Staphylococcus aureus and more particularly Staphylococcus aureus group-III strains.
- the invention provides compounds of formula I:
- L is a divalent linker moiety 3 to 10 atoms in length
- Z is a divalent linker moiety 3 to 14 atoms in length
- R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group
- R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; where, when R 1 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R 6 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and when R 2 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R 7 is a hydrogen or a methyl group
- R 10 is hydrogen or a methyl group
- R 5 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl group, an optional
- atoms in length refers to the shortest number of atoms directly bonded between the points of attachment of L and Z in the formulas herein. If there are two or more possible ways to calculate the number of atoms bonded between the attachment points, the shortest number of atoms is that which is intended to be limited by the recited range.
- Substitution when present includes substitution with one or more non-hydrogen groups selected an from halogen, hydroxyl, alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, amino-substituted alkyl having 1-4 carbon atoms, alkoxy having 1-3 carbon atoms, amino, alkylamino having 1-3 carbon atoms, dialkyl amino where the alkyl group has 1-3 carbon atoms, aryl, haloalkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, phenyl, benzyl, phenoxy, benzyloxy, oxo ( ⁇ O), sulfhydryl, alkylthio having 1-3 carbon atoms, —CO 2 R where R is hydrogen or an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, —COR, where R is H or an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, —CO—NR 2 , where each R is independently hydrogen or alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, azido (N 3 —), nitro, cyano, iso
- substitution of aryl or heteroaryl groups include substitution in which substituents on two ring atoms together with the ring atom or atoms to which they are attached form a 5-8 member ring which can contain 0 (carbocyclic) or 1-3 heteroatoms (particularly N, O or S).
- Substitution of alkyl groups includes substitution with one or more optionally substituted aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, carbocyclic groups or heterocyclic groups, where substitution if present includes substitution with one or more halogens, hydroxyls, alkyl groups, amino, alkylamino or dialkyl amino groups.
- L is a divalent moiety —(CH 2 ) l —, where l is 3-8 and one, two or three of the —CH 2 — moieties therein are optionally replaced with —O—, —S—, —CO—, or —NH—, and/or a —CH 2 —CH 2 — therein is optionally replaced with a double bond, a phenylene moiety or a cyclohexylene moiety.
- L is —(CH 2 ) 1-4 —S—CO—, —(CH 2 ) 1-4 —O—CO—, —(CH 2 ) 1-4 —NH—CO—, —(CH 2 ) 1-2 —O—(CH 2 ) 1-2 —CO—, —(CH 2 ) 2-5 —CO—, —CO—(CH 2 ) 1-4 —CO—, or —CH 2 —NHCONH—CH 2 —.
- L is —CH 2 —X—CO—, where X is, S, O or NH.
- L is —CH 2 —S—CO—, or —CH 2 —CH 2 —S—CO—.
- Z is selected from:
- R 3 is an aryl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments R 3 is an aryl-substituted methyl group. In specific embodiments R 3 is an optionally substituted benzyl group. In specific embodiments R 3 is a 4-OH-subsituted benzyl group. In specific embodiments, R 3 is a heteroaryl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments, R 3 is an indolyl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments R 8 is an aryl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments R 8 is an aryl-substituted methyl group.
- R 8 is an optionally substituted benzyl group. In specific embodiments R 8 is a 4-OH-subsituted benzyl group. In specific embodiments, R 8 is a heteroaryl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments, R 8 is an indolyl-substituted alkyl group.
- Z is —NH—(CH 2 ) n —CO—, where n is 1-7, n is 1-5, n is 1 or n is 2.
- Z is —NR 9 —CH(R 4 )—CO—NR 8 —CH(R 3 )—CO—.
- R 3 is a hydrogen and R 8 is a group other than a hydrogen.
- R 4 is a hydrogen and R 9 is a group other than a hydrogen.
- R 8 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and R 3 is an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group.
- R 9 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and R 4 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- Z is:
- R 3 is hydrogen and R 8 is independently selected from an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group. More specifically R 8 is an optionally substituted aryl group. More specifically R 8 is an optionally substituted phenyl group. More specifically R 8 is an aryl or heteroaryl-substituted alkyl group. More specifically R 8 is an aryl or heteroaryl-substituted methyl group.
- R 8 is an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl.
- R 8 or R 9 can be a substituted phenyl ring or benzyl ring in which two ring substituents together form a 5- or 6-member saturated or unsaturated ring having 1 or 2 nitrogens, oxygens or both.
- R 8 or R 9 can independently be piperonyl groups.
- R 4 is hydrogen, or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms; and R 9 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group.
- R 8 and R 9 are both hydrogens.
- R 9 is hydrogen or methyl and R 4 is hydrogen, methyl, or —CH 2 —COOH.
- R 9 is hydrogen, methyl or —CH 2 —COOH and R 4 is hydrogen or methyl.
- R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl groups having 2-6 carbon atoms and R 6 and R 7 are hydrogens.
- the invention provides a method for regulating virulence in Staphylococcus which comprises the step of contacting the bacterium or a biofilm of said bacterium with one or more compounds of formulas I, IA or II.
- virulence is attenuated.
- the invention provides a method of inhibiting biofilm formation or for dispersing an already formed biofilm by contacting the bacterium or biofilm with a compound of formula I. In a specific embodiment, the invention provides a method of inhibiting biofilm formation or for dispersing an already formed biofilm by contacting the bacterium or biofilm with a compound of formula III.
- the invention provides an improved solid-phase synthesis protocol for the synthesis of certain cyclic peptides that involves a chemoselective thiol-thioester exchange in the macrocyclization step. This method is illustrated in examples herein and is useful for the synthesis of compounds of this invention.
- the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically effective amount of one or more of the compounds of formulas herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- the one or more compounds exhibit activation of an AgrC receptor.
- the one or more compounds exhibit activation of the AgrC receptor.
- the one or more compounds exhibit inhibition of an AgrC receptor.
- the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically effective amount of two or more of the compounds of formulas herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically effective amount of two or more of the compounds of formulas herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier wherein the two or more compounds exhibit differences in inhibition or activation of the AgrC receptors. More specifically, in such compositions the two or more compounds exhibit group-selective inhibition for one or more of the AgrC receptors.
- FIGS. 1A-B provides a schematic illustration of the agr quorum sensing circuit in S. aureus .
- FIG. 1A (a) The precursor peptide AgrD is processed by AgrB. (b) The mature AIP signal is secreted across the cell membrane. (c) AIP binds the extracellular domain of AgrC. (d) The histidine kinase domain of AgrC phosphorylates AgrA. (e) AgrA binds the P2 and P3 promoters to autoactivate the agr system and upregulate RNAIII transcription. (f) In selected S. aureus strains, RNAIII promotes the production of toxic shock syndrome toxin-1 (TSST-1).
- FIG. 1B provides the structures and sequences of the four AIP signals (IIV) corresponding to the four S. aureus groups.
- FIGS. 2A-2D provides a set of four competition dose response agonism curves (A-D) for the native AIPs (I-IV) in the presence of AIP-III D4A at 2 nM (group-I (2A) and group-11(2B)) or 0.3 nM (group-III (2C) and group-IV(2D)) in the group-I-IV fluorescence reporter strains. Error bars indicate standard error of the mean of triplicate values.
- FIG. 3 is a graph illustrating attenuation of TSST-1 production in wild-type group-III S. aureus (MN8) using selected compounds of the invention.
- Bacteria were either untreated (black bar, 1), treated with AIP analogs at 10 nM (light gray bars, 2) or 1 nM (white bars, 3), or treated with previously reported cyclic dipeptides at 100 ⁇ M (dark gray bars, 4).
- TSST-1 concentrations are presented as percentage of the TSST-1 concentration in untreated cultures.
- FIG. 4 illustrates exemplary peptidomimetics of this invention.
- FIG. 5 illustrates exemplary compounds of this invention of formula V.
- This invention is based at least in part on the synthesis of structural variants of the AIP-III cyclic peptide and assessment of the activity of API-III structural variants for modulation of one or more of the four AgrC receptors of Staphylococcus aureus .
- Structural variants include those generated by alanine, D-amino acid, N-methylated amino acid and peptoid scans of AIP-III. Additional structural variants examined include double- and triple mutated variants, amino-truncated and amino-elongated variants. Compounds have been identified which inhibit one or more of the AgrC receptors and more specifically which inhibit all four of the AgrC receptors at picomolar IC 50 values.
- the invention provides compounds of formula I:
- L is a divalent linker moiety 3 to 6 atoms in length
- Z is a divalent linker moiety 3 to 10 atoms in length
- R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group
- R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; where, when R 1 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R 6 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and when R 2 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R 7 is a hydrogen or a methyl group
- R 10 is hydrogen or a methyl group
- R 5 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl group or R
- R 5 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- R 12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH 2 —CO—NH 2 group.
- R 14 is a methyl group.
- R 12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH 2 —CO—NH 2 group and R 14 is methyl.
- R 5 is the dipeptidyl moiety A-A-, I-A-, A-N—, or I—NMeN.
- atoms in length refers to the shortest number of atoms directly bonded between the points of attachment of L and Z in the formulas herein. If there are two or more possible ways to calculate the number of atoms bonded between the attachment points, the shortest number of atoms bonded between the two points is that which is intended to be limited by the recited range.
- the linker —CO—(CH 2 ) 5 —CO— is 7 atoms in length (the ⁇ O atoms are not directly bonded between the points of attachment.
- Compounds of the invention do not include the naturally occurring AIP-I, AIP-II, AIP-III or AIP-IV peptides. Compounds of the invention do not include tAIP-I D2A. In a specific embodiment, the compound of the invention is not the cyclic thioester (C-A-F-LL).
- the invention also provides compounds of formula IA:
- R 6 and R 7 are both H and R 1 and R 2 are alkyl groups having 3 to 6 carbon atoms.
- Z is
- R 3 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group
- R 4 is hydrogen, or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms
- R 9 and R 8 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; wherein when R 3 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R 8 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and when R 4 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R 9 is a hydrogen or a methyl group.
- R 8 and R 9 are both hydrogens. More specifically in this embodiment, R 9 is hydrogen or methyl and R 4 is hydrogen, methyl, or —CH 2 —COOH. More specifically in this embodiment, R 9 is hydrogen, methyl or —CH 2 —COOH and R 4 is hydrogen or methyl. More specifically in this embodiment, R 8 is hydrogen or methyl and R 3 is hydrogen, an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl.
- R 8 is an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, and R 3 is hydrogen or methyl. More specifically in this embodiment, R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl groups having 2-6 carbon atoms and R 6 and R 7 are hydrogens.
- the invention provides compounds of formula IIA:
- L, R 5 , and R 10 are as defined above; R 6 , R 7 , R 8 and R 9 are independently selected from hydrogen or methyl; R 1 and R 2 are selected from unsubstituted alkyl groups having 3-6 carbon atoms; R 4 is an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms; and R 3 is an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heterocyclic group or an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms substituted with an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocyclic group, where substitution if present is substitution with one or more halogens, or —OH groups.
- L is —CH 2 —X—CO—, where X is S, N or O.
- L is —CH 2 —S—CO—.
- R 4 is a methyl group.
- R 3 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms substituted with an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocyclic group.
- R 3 is an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl group.
- the invention provides compounds of formula IIB:
- L, R 5 , and R 10 are as defined above for formulas I and IA; R 6 , R 7 and R 9 are independently selected from hydrogen or methyl; R 1 and R 2 are selected from alkyl groups having 3-6 carbon atoms; R 4 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms, where substitution if present is substitution with one or more halogens, —OH, or —COOH; and R 8 is an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heterocyclic group or an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms substituted with an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocyclic group, where substitution, if present, is substitution with one or more halogens, or —OH groups.
- R 5 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- R 12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH 2 —CO—NH 2 group.
- R 14 is a methyl group.
- R 12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH 2 —CO—NH 2 group and R 14 is methyl.
- R 5 is the dipeptidyl moiety A-A-, I-A-, A-N—, or I—NMeN.
- L is —CH 2 —X—CO— where X is S, N or O.
- L is —CH 2 —S—CO—.
- R 8 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms substituted with an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocyclic group.
- R 5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms
- R 9 and R 4 are independently hydrogen or methyl
- R 3 is an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl and more specifically R 3 is benzyl, 4-OH-benzyl, or indolyl.
- the invention provides compounds of formula III:
- R 5 , R 10 , L and Z are as defined as above; and R 1 , R 2 , R 6 or R 7 selected from hydrogen or an alkyl group having 3-6 carbon atoms, wherein one or both of R 7 and R 6 are an alkyl group having 3-6 carbon atoms and if R 6 is an alkyl group, then R 1 is hydrogen and if R 7 is an alkyl group then R 2 is hydrogen.
- L is —CH 2 —S—CO—.
- R 6 or R 7 is a 2-methyl propyl group.
- Z is:
- R 3 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms optionally substituted with an optionally substituted aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl group; an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl group or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group.
- R 1 or R 2 is a 2-methylpropyl group
- R 3 is a methyl or ethyl group substituted with a phenyl, 5-OH-phenyl, a 1H-indo-3-yl or a 5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl group.
- L is —CH 2 —S—CO—; R 3 is a benzyl or a 4-OH benzyl group; and R 4 is a methyl or a —CH 2 —COOH group.
- R 5 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- R 12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH 2 —CO—NH 2 group.
- R 14 is a methyl group.
- R 12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH 2 —CO—NH 2 group and R 14 is methyl.
- R 5 is the dipeptidyl moiety A-A-, I-A-, A-N—, or I—NMeN.
- the invention provides compounds of formula IV and IVA:
- L is L is —CH 2 —X—CO—, where X is S, O or NH.
- L is —CH 2 —S—CO—, or —CH 2 —CH 2 —S—CO—.
- R 5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- n is 3, R 6 -R 8 are hydrogen or methyl, R 2 is an alkyl having 1-6 or 4-6 carbon atoms, and R 1 is an alkyl group, particularly a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group. In more specific embodiments, R 1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl group.
- R 1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted phenyl group. In more specific embodiments, R 1 is a benzyl group. In specific embodiments R 5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- n is 2, R 6 -R 8 are hydrogen or methyl, R 2 is an alkyl having 1-6 or 4-6 carbon atoms, and R 1 is an alkyl group, particularly a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group. In more specific embodiments, R 1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl group.
- R 1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted phenyl group. In more specific embodiments, R 1 is a benzyl group. In specific embodiments R 5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- n is 5-7, R 6 -R 8 are hydrogen or methyl, R 2 is an alkyl having 1-6 or 4-6 carbon atoms, and R 1 is an alkyl group, particularly a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group. In more specific embodiments, R 1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl group.
- R 1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted phenyl group. In more specific embodiments, R 1 is a benzyl group. In specific embodiments R 5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- R 5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms which is substituted with an optionally substituted carbocyclic or heterocyclic group.
- the carbocyclic or heterocyclic group has a 5- or 6-member ring which is saturated or unsaturated and in which one or two ring carbons are —CO— moieties.
- R 5 is:
- R 20 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms where optionally substitution is substitution with one or more hydroxyl, halogen, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino or dialkylamino groups.
- R 5 is the dipeptidyl moiety A-A-, I-A-, A-N—, or I—NMeN.
- R 9 is hydrogen or methyl and R 4 is hydrogen, methyl, or —CH 2 —COOH. In specific embodiments of any formula herein, R 9 is hydrogen, methyl or —CH 2 —COOH and R 4 is hydrogen or methyl. In specific embodiments of any formula herein, R 8 is hydrogen or methyl and R 3 is hydrogen, an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl.
- R 8 is an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, and R 3 is hydrogen or methyl.
- R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl groups having 2-6 carbon atoms and R 6 and R 7 are hydrogens.
- alkyl or alkyl group refer to a monoradical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon.
- Alkyl groups include straight-chain and branched alkyl groups. Unless otherwise indicated alkyl groups have 1-8 carbon atoms (C1-C8 alkyl groups) and preferred are those that contain 1-6 carbon atoms (C1-C6 alkyl groups) and more preferred are those that contain 1-3 carbon atoms (C1-C3 alkyl groups). Alkyl groups are optionally substituted with one or more non-hydrogen substituents as described herein.
- alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, cyclopropyl, n-butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, branched-pentyl, n-hexyl, branched hexyl, all of which are optionally substituted.
- Substituted alkyl groups include fully halogenated or semihalogenated alkyl groups, such as alkyl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms, bromine atoms and/or iodine atoms.
- Substituted alkyl groups include fully fluorinated or semifluorinated alkyl.
- Cycloalkyl groups herein preferably have 1 ring having 5-8 carbon atoms and preferably have 5 or 6 carbon atoms.
- Cycloalkylene refers to divalent moieties derived formally from cycloalkyl groups as described above by removal of an additional hydrogen e.g., —(C 6 H 12 )—, a cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkylene, particularly cyclohexylene groups are often employed in linkers.
- An carbocyclic group is a group having one or more saturated or unsaturated carbon rings.
- Carbocyclic groups for example, contain one or two double bonds.
- One or more carbons in an carbocyclic ring can be —CO— groups.
- carbocyclic c groups include those having 3-12 carbon atoms, and optionally replacing 1 or 2 carbon atoms with a —CO— group and optionally having 1, 2 or 3 double bonds.
- Carbocyclic groups include those having 5-6 ring carbons.
- Carbocyclic groups can contain one or more rings each of which is saturated or unsaturated.
- Carbocyclic groups include bicyclic and tricyclic groups. Preferred carbocyclic groups have a single 5- or 6-member ring.
- Carbocyclic groups are optionally substituted as described herein. Specifically, carbocyclic groups can be substituted with one or more alkyl groups.
- Carbocyclic groups include among others cycloalkyl and cycloalkenyl
- a heterocyclic group is a group having one or more saturated or unsaturated carbon rings and which contains one to three heteroatoms (e.g., N, O or S) per ring. These groups optionally contain one, two or three double bonds. To satisfy valence requirement, a ring atom may be substituted as described herein. One or more carbons in the heterocyclic ring can be —CO— groups. Heterocyclic groups include those having 3-12 carbon atoms, and 1-6, heteroatoms, wherein 1 or 2 carbon atoms are replaced with a —CO— group. Heterocyclic groups include those having 3-12 or 3-10 ring atoms of which up to three can be heteroatoms other than carbon.
- Heterocyclic groups can contain one or more rings each of which is saturated or unsaturated.
- Heterocyclic groups include bicyclic and tricyclic groups.
- Preferred Heterocyclic groups have 5- or 6-member rings.
- Heterocyclic groups are optionally substituted as described herein. Specifically, heterocyclic groups can be substituted with one or more alkyl groups.
- Heterocyclic groups include those having 5- and 6-member rings with one or two nitrogens and one or two double bonds.
- Heterocyclic groups include those having 5- and 6-member rings with an oxygen or a sulfur and one or two double bonds.
- Heterocyclic group include those having 5- or 6-member rings and two different heteroatom, e.g., N and O, O and S or N and S.
- heterocyclic groups include among others among others, pyrrolidinyl, piperidyl, piperazinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolinyl, furyl, thienyl, morpholinyl, oxazolyl, oxazolinyl, oxazolidinyl, indolyl, triazolyl, and triazinyl groups.
- Heterocyclene refers to a divalent species formally derived from a heterocylic group as described above by removal of a hydrogen.
- Aryl groups include groups having one or more 5- or 6-member aromatic rings.
- Aryl groups can contain one, two or three, 6-member aromatic rings.
- Aryl groups can contain two or more fused aromatic rings.
- Aryl groups can contain two or three fused aromatic rings.
- Aryl groups are optionally substituted with one or more non-hydrogen substituents.
- Substituted aryl groups include among others those which are substituted with alkyl or alkenyl groups, which groups in turn can be optionally substituted.
- Specific aryl groups include phenyl groups, biphenyl groups, and naphthyl groups, all of which are optionally substituted as described herein.
- Substituted aryl groups include fully halogenated or semihalogenated aryl groups, such as aryl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms, bromine atoms and/or iodine atoms.
- Substituted aryl groups include fully fluorinated or semifluorinated aryl groups, such as aryl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms.
- Heteroaryl groups include groups having one or more aromatic rings in which at least one ring contains a heteroatom (a non-carbon ring atom). Heteroaryl groups include those having one or two heteroaromatic rings carrying 1, 2 or 3 heteroatoms and optionally have one 6-member aromatic ring. Heteroaryl groups can contain 5-20, 5-12 or 5-10 ring atoms. Heteroaryl groups include those having one aromatic ring contains a heteroatom and one aromatic ring containing carbon ring atoms. Heteroaryl groups include those having one or more 5- or 6-member aromatic heteroaromatic rings and one or more 6-member carbon aromatic rings. Heteroaromatic rings can include one or more N, O, or S atoms in the ring.
- Heteroaromatic rings can include those with one, two or three N, those with one or two O, and those with one or two S, or combinations of one or two or three N, O or S.
- Specific heteroaryl groups include furyl, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, quinolinyl, and purinyl groups. In specific embodiments herein aryl groups contain no heteroatoms in the aryl rings. Aryl including heteroaryl groups are optionally substituted.
- Heteroatoms include O, N, S, P or B. More specifically heteroatoms are N, O or S. In specific embodiments, one or more heteroatoms are substituted for carbons in aromatic or carbocyclic rings. To satisfy valence any heteroatoms in such aromatic or carbocyclic rings may be bonded to H or a substituent group, e.g., an alkyl group or other substituent.
- Arylalkyl groups are alkyl groups substituted with one or more aryl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted.
- Exemplary arylalkyl groups are benzyl groups.
- Heteroarylalkyl groups are alkyl groups substituted with one or more heteroaryl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted.
- Alkylaryl groups are aryl groups substituted with one or more alkyl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted.
- Specific alkylaryl groups are alkyl-substituted phenyl groups such as methylphenyl.
- Alkylheteroaryl groups are heteroaryl groups substituted with one or more alkyl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted.
- An alkoxy group is an alkyl group, as broadly discussed above, linked to oxygen (R alkyl —O—).
- An aryloxy group is an aryl group, as discussed above, linked to an oxygen (R aryl —O—).
- a heteroaryloxy group is a heteroaryl group as discussed above linked to an oxygen (R heteroaryl —O—).
- An acyl group is an R′—CO group where R′ in general is a hydrogen, an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl group as described above.
- R′ in general is a hydrogen, an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl group as described above.
- acyl groups have 1-20, 1-12 or 1-6 carbon atoms and optionally 1-3 heteroatom, optionally one double bond or one triple bond.
- R is a C1-C6 alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group. cyclic configuration or a combination thereof, attached to the parent structure through a carbonyl functionality. Examples include acetyl, benzoyl, propionyl, isobutyryl, or oxalyl.
- R′ group of acyl groups are optionally substituted as described herein.
- R′ is hydrogen
- the group is a formyl group.
- An acetyl group is a CH 3 —CO— group.
- Another exemplary acyl group is a benzyloxy group.
- An alkylthio group is an alkyl group, as broadly discussed above, linked to a sulfur (R alkyl —S—)
- An arylthio group is an aryl group, as discussed above, linked to a sulfur (R aryl —S—).
- amino group is refer to the species —N(H) 2 —.
- alkylamino refers to the species —NHR′′ where R′′ is an alkyl group, particularly an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- dialkylamino refers to the species —NR′′ 2 where each R′′ is independently an alkyl group, particularly an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- Groups herein are optionally substituted most generally alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and aryl, heteroaryl groups can be substituted with one or more halogen, hydroxyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, oxo group, thioxo group, azide group, cyanate group, isocyanate group, acyl group, haloalkyl group, alkyl group, alkenyl group or alkynyl group (particularly those having 1-4 carbons), a phenyl or benzyl group (including those that are halogen or alkyl substituted), alkoxy, alkylthio, or mercapto (HS—).
- optional substitution is substitution with 1-12 non-hydrogen substituents. In specific embodiments, optional substitution is substitution with 1-6 non-hydrogen substituents. In specific embodiments, optional substitution is substitution with 1-3 non-hydrogen substituents. In specific embodiments, optional substituents contain 6 or fewer carbon atoms. In specific embodiments, optional substitution is substitution by one or more halogen, hydroxy group, cyano group, oxo group, thioxo group, unsubstituted C1-C6 alkyl group or unsubstituted aryl group.
- oxo group and thioxo group refer to substitution of a carbon atom with a ⁇ O or a ⁇ S to form respectively —CO— (carbonyl) or —CS— (thiocarbonyl) groups.
- Specific substituted alkyl groups include haloalkyl groups, particularly trihalomethyl groups and specifically trifluoromethyl groups.
- Specific substituted aryl groups include mono-, di-, tri, tetra- and pentahalo-substituted phenyl groups; mono-, di, tri-, tetra-, penta-, hexa-, and hepta-halo-substituted naphthalene groups; 3- or 4-halo-substituted phenyl groups, 3- or 4-alkyl-substituted phenyl groups, 3- or 4-alkoxy-substituted phenyl groups, 3- or 4-RCO-substituted phenyl, 5- or 6-halo-substituted naphthalene groups.
- substituted aryl groups include acetylphenyl groups, particularly 4-acetylphenyl groups; fluorophenyl groups, particularly 3-fluorophenyl and 4-fluorophenyl groups; chlorophenyl groups, particularly 3-chlorophenyl and 4-chlorophenyl groups; methylphenyl groups, particularly 4-methylphenyl groups, and methoxyphenyl groups, particularly 4-methoxyphenyl groups.
- any of the above groups which contain one or more substituents it is understood, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non-feasible.
- the compounds of this invention include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds.
- drugability relates to pharmaceutical properties of a prospective drug for administration, distribution, metabolism and excretion. Drugability is assessed in various ways in the art. For example, the “Lipinski Rule of 5” for determining drug-like characteristics in a molecule related to in vivo absorption and permeability can be applied (C. A. Lipinski, F. Lombardo, B. W. Dominy, P. J. Feeney, Experimental and computational approaches to estimate solubility and permeability in drug discovery and development settings , Adv. Drug Del. Rev., 2001, 46, 3-26 and Arup K. Ghose, Vellarkad N.
- Not more than 5 hydrogen bond donors e.g., nitrogen or oxygen atoms with one or more hydrogens
- Not more than 10 hydrogen bond acceptors e.g., nitrogen or oxygen atoms
- Molecular weight under 500 g/mol and more preferably between 160 and 480; and (4) log P less than 5 and more preferably between ⁇ 0.4 to +5.6 and yet more preferably ⁇ 1 ⁇ log P ⁇ 2.
- Compounds of this invention preferred for therapeutic application include those that do not violate one or more of 1-4 above.
- Compounds of this invention preferred for therapeutic application include those having log P less than 5 and more preferably between ⁇ 0.4 to +5.6 and yet more preferably ⁇ 1 ⁇ log P.
- Compounds of the invention may contain chemical groups (acidic or basic groups) that can be in the form of salts.
- Exemplary acid addition salts include acetates (such as those formed with acetic acid or trihaloacetic acid, for example, trifluoroacetic acid), adipates, alginates, ascorbates, aspartates, benzoates, benzenesulfonates, bisulfates, borates, butyrates, citrates, camphorates, camphorsulfonates, cyclopentanepropionates, digluconates, dodecylsulfates, ethanesulfonates, fumarates, glucoheptanoates, glycerophosphates, hemisulfates, heptanoates, hexanoates, hydrochlorides (formed with hydrochloric acid), hydrobromides (formed with hydrogen bromide), hydroiodides, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonates, lac
- Exemplary basic salts include ammonium salts, alkali metal salts such as sodium, lithium, and potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and magnesium salts, salts with organic bases (for example, organic amines) such as benzathines, dicyclohexylamines, hydrabamines [formed with N,N-bis(dehydro-abietyl)ethylenediamine], N-methyl-D-glucamines, N-methyl-D-glucamides, t-butyl amines, and salts with amino acids such as arginine, lysine and the like.
- organic bases for example, organic amines
- organic bases for example, organic amines
- benzathines dicyclohexylamines
- hydrabamines [formed with N,N-bis(dehydro-abietyl)ethylenediamine]
- N-methyl-D-glucamines N-methyl-D-glucamides
- Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quaternized with agents such as lower alkyl halides (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (e.g., dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl, and diamyl sulfates), long chain halides (e.g., decyl, lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), aralkyl halides (e.g., benzyl and phenethyl bromides), and others.
- lower alkyl halides e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides
- dialkyl sulfates e.g., dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl, and diamyl sulfates
- Salt of the invention include “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” which refers to those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free bases or free acids, and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable.
- Pharmaceutically acceptable salts comprise pharmaceutically-acceptable anions and/or cations.
- inventive compounds may exist in their tautomeric form, in which hydrogen atoms are transposed to other parts of the molecules and the chemical bonds between the atoms of the molecules are consequently rearranged. It should be understood that all tautomeric forms, insofar as they may exist, are included within the invention. Additionally, inventive compounds may have trans and cis isomers and may contain one or more chiral centers, therefore exist in enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms. The invention includes all such isomers, as well as mixtures of cis and trans isomers, mixtures of diastereomers and racemic mixtures of enantiomers (optical isomers).
- any one of the isomers or a mixture of more than one isomer is intended.
- the processes for preparation can use racemates, enantiomers, or diastereomers as starting materials.
- enantiomeric or diastereomeric products are prepared, they can be separated by conventional methods, for example, by chromatographic or fractional crystallization.
- the inventive compounds may be in the free or hydrate form.
- the atoms therein may have various isotopic forms, e.g., isotopes of hydrogen include deuterium and tritium. All isotopic variants of compounds of the invention are included within the invention and particularly included at deuterium and 13 C isotopic variants. It will be appreciated that such isotopic variants may be useful for carrying out various chemical and biological analyses, investigations of reaction mechanisms and the like. Methods for making isotopic variants are known in the art.
- the invention expressly includes pharmaceutically usable solvates of compounds according to formulas herein.
- the compounds of formula I can be solvated, e.g. hydrated.
- the solvation can occur in the course of the manufacturing process or can take place, e.g. as a consequence of hygroscopic properties of an initially anhydrous compound of formulas herein (hydration).
- Prodrugs of the compounds of the invention are useful in the methods of this invention. Any compound that will be converted in vivo to provide a biologically, pharmaceutically or therapeutically active form of a compound of the invention is a prodrug.
- Various examples and forms of prodrugs are well known in the art. Examples of prodrugs are found, inter alia, in Design of Prodrugs, edited by H. Bundgaard, (Elsevier, 1985), Methods in Enzymology, Vol. 42, at pp. 309-396, edited by K. Widder, et. al. (Academic Press, 1985); A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, edited by Krosgaard-Larsen and H.
- Bundgaard Chapter 5, “Design and Application of Prodrugs,” by H. Bundgaard, at pp. 113-191, 1991); H. Bundgaard, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, Vol. 8, p. 1-38 (1992); H. Bundgaard, et al., Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences, Vol. 77, p. 285 (1988); and Nogrady (1985) Medicinal Chemistry A Biochemical Approach, Oxford University Press, New York, pages 388-392).
- Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are those carriers that are compatible with the other ingredients in the formulation and are biologically acceptable.
- Carriers can be solid or liquid.
- Solid carriers can include one or more substances that can also act as flavoring agents, lubricants, solubilizers, suspending agents, fillers, glidants, compression aids, binders, tablet-disintegrating agents, or encapsulating materials.
- Liquid carriers can be used in preparing solutions, suspensions, emulsions, syrups and elixirs.
- the active ingredient can be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier such as water (of appropriate purity, e.g., pyrogen-free, sterile, etc.), an organic solvent, a mixture of both, or a pharmaceutically acceptable oil or fat.
- the liquid carrier can contain other suitable pharmaceutical additives such as, for example, solubilizers, emulsifiers, buffers, preservatives, sweeteners, flavoring agents, suspending agents, thickening agents, colors, viscosity regulators, stabilizers or osmo-regulators.
- Compositions for oral administration can be in either liquid or solid form.
- Suitable solid carriers include, for example, calcium phosphate, magnesium stearate, talc, sugars, lactose, dextrin, starch, gelatin, cellulose, methyl cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidine, low melting waxes and ion exchange resins.
- suitable examples of liquid carriers for oral and parenteral administration include water of appropriate purity, aqueous solutions (particularly containing additives, e.g. cellulose derivatives, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose solution), alcohols (including monohydric alcohols and polyhydric alcohols e.g. glycols) and their derivatives, and oils.
- the carrier can also be an oily ester such as ethyl oleate and isopropyl myristate.
- Sterile liquid carriers are used in sterile liquid form compositions for parenteral administration.
- the liquid carrier for pressurized compositions can be halogenated hydrocarbon or other pharmaceutically acceptable propellant.
- Liquid pharmaceutical compositions that are sterile solutions or suspensions can be administered by, for example, intramuscular, intraperitoneal or subcutaneous injection. Sterile solutions can also be administered intravenously.
- Compositions for oral administration can be in either liquid or solid form.
- the carrier can also be in the form of creams and ointments, pastes, and gels.
- the creams and ointments can be viscous liquid or semisolid emulsions of either the oil-in-water or water-in-oil type.
- Pastes comprised of absorptive powders dispersed in petroleum or hydrophilic petroleum containing the active ingredient can also be suitable.
- Staphylococcal infections can affect various parts of the body and can include skin infection and more serious conditions such as osteomyelitis, endocarditis, septic arthritis, and toxic shock syndrome.
- S. aureus strains are considered the leading cause of nosocomial infections in the United States.
- Staphylococcal infections, particularly S. aureus infections caused by a strain that is resistant to commonly used antibiotics are particularly serious and life-threatening. Of particular concern are strains that exhibit increased resistance to vancomycin.
- Compounds of the invention are useful in the treatment of such infections.
- Administration of one or more compounds of the invention can be combined with antibiotic regimens used for the treatment of staphylococcal infections.
- Various known antibiotics and various known antibiotic regimens can be employed in combination with one or more of the compounds of this invention.
- One of ordinary skill in the art can select form a variety of known antibiotics, which may be used alone or in combination, and which can specifically include, vancomycin, linezolid, and oxacillin.
- one or more compounds of the invention can be used in combination with intravenous or oral antibiotics.
- the invention provides a medicament for treatment of an infectious disease, particularly a staphylococcal infection.
- the medicament comprises a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of this invention as illustrated in one or more formulas herein which compounds exhibit antivirulence and/or antibacterial activity.
- the medicament of this invention can also comprise a therapeutically effective amount of one or more antibiotics.
- the invention also provides a method for making this medicament which comprises combining a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of this invention having anti-virulence activity with a selected pharmaceutical carrier appropriate for a given method of administration.
- the method for making a medicament can additional include combining a therapeutically effective amount of one or more antibiotics in the medicament.
- the medicament may be an oral dosage form, an intravenous dosage form or any other art-recognized dosage form.
- the present invention also provides methods of increasing or reducing the virulence of Staphylococcus species and specifically Staphylococcus aureus .
- the method comprises contacting a bacterium with an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
- the method comprises contacting a bacterium with a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compounds of the present invention.
- the method comprises contacting a bacterium with a precursor which can form an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
- Methods of this invention comprise the step of administering a “therapeutically effective amount” of the present therapeutic formulations containing the present compounds, to treat, reduce or regulate a disease state in a patient, including a disease state involving one or more infectious agents such as bacteria.
- a “therapeutically effective amount” refers to the amount of the therapeutic formulation, that, when administered to the individual is effective to treat, reduce or regulate a disease state in a patient, including a disease state involving one or more infectious agents such as bacteria and more specifically Staphylococcus .
- the therapeutically effective amount of a given compound or formulation will depend at least in part upon, the mode of administration (e.g.
- any carrier or vehicle employed any carrier or vehicle employed, and the specific individual to whom the formulation is to be administered (age, weight, condition, sex, etc.).
- the dosage requirements need to achieve the “therapeutically effective amount” vary with the particular formulations employed, the route of administration, and clinical objectives. Based on the results obtained in standard pharmacological test procedures, projected daily dosages of active compound can be determined as is understood in the art.
- Compounds of the invention are useful in therapeutic methods, particularly for treating infections. Any suitable form of administration can be employed in the method herein.
- the compounds of this invention can, for example, be administered in oral dosage forms including tablets, capsules, pills, powders, granules, elixirs, tinctures, suspensions, syrups and emulsions.
- Oral dosage forms may include sustained release or timed release formulations.
- the compounds of this invention may also be administered topically, intravenously, intraperitoneally, subcutaneously, or intramuscularly, all using dosage forms well known to those of ordinary skill in the pharmaceutical arts.
- Compounds of this invention can also be administered in intranasal form by topical use of suitable intranasal vehicles.
- suitable intranasal vehicles For intranasal or intrabronchial inhalation or insulation, the compounds of this invention may be formulated into an aqueous or partially aqueous solution, which can then be utilized in the form of an aerosol.
- Administration includes any form of administration that is known in the art and is intended to encompass administration in any appropriate dosage form and further is intended to encompass administration of a compound, alone or in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- Pharmaceutical carriers are selected as is known in the art based on the chosen route of administration and standard pharmaceutical practice.
- the compounds of this invention can also be administered to the eye, preferably as a topical opthalmic formulation.
- the compounds of this invention can also be combined with a preservative and an appropriate vehicle such as mineral oil or liquid lanolin to provide an opthalmic ointment.
- the compounds of this invention may be administered rectally or vaginally in the form of a conventional suppository.
- the compounds of this invention may also be administered transdermally through the use of a transdermal patch containing the active compound and a carrier that is inert to the active compound, is non-toxic to the skin, and allows delivery of the agent for systemic absorption into the blood stream via the skin.
- the compounds of the invention may be administered employing an occlusive device.
- an occlusive device A variety of occlusive devices can be used to release an ingredient into the blood stream such as a semipermeable membrane covering a reservoir containing the active ingredient with or without a carrier, or a matrix containing the active ingredient.
- Other occlusive devices are known in the literature.
- compositions and medicaments of this invention comprise one or more compounds in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient, or diluent.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier such as, for example, those described in Remingtons Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th edition, ed. Alfonoso R. Gennaro, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa. (1985), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the invention also encompasses method for making a medicament employing one or more compounds of this invention which exhibit a therapeutic effect.
- the present invention provides pharmaceutical and therapeutic preparations comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of the present invention of Formula I optionally in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- pharmaceutical and therapeutic preparations of this invention comprise an amount or combined amount of one or more compounds of this invention effective for bacterial interference, particularly of a Staphylococcus species and more particularly of Staphylococcus aureus and including a Staphylococcus aureus group III strain and more particularly a bacterial human or veterinary pathogen.
- Compounds useful in the methods of this invention include pharmaceutically-acceptable salts of the compounds of formulas herein.
- Compounds useful in the methods of this invention include pharmaceutically-acceptable prodrugs of the compounds of formulas herein. Salts include any salts derived from the acids of the formulas herein which are acceptable for use in human or veterinary applications.
- Bacterial interference includes attenuation of virulence.
- the present invention provides a method of treating an infectious disease comprising administering to an individual in need of treatment, a composition comprising one or more compounds of the present invention.
- the infectious disease relates to that associated with an infectious agent comprising a bacterium.
- the bacteria are Staphylococcus .
- the bacteria are one or more selected from the group consisting of S. aureus, S. epidermidis .
- the bacteria are one or more drug resistant Staphylococcus .
- Compounds of the invention can be employed in human treatment or in veterinary treatment.
- Linear peptides were synthesized on Boc-protected, amino acid pre-loaded 4-hydroxymethyl-phenylacetamidomethyl (PAM) resin (0.6-0.8 mmol/g) using standard solid-phase synthesis protocols.
- PAM 4-hydroxymethyl-phenylacetamidomethyl
- Reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography was performed using a Shimadzu system equipped with an SCL-10Avp controller, an LC-10AT pump, an FCV-10ALvp solvent mixer, and an SPD-10MAvp UV/vis diode array detector.
- An analytical Phenomenex Gemini C18 column (5 ⁇ m, 4.6 mm ⁇ 250 mm, 110 ⁇ ) was used for analytical RP-HPLC work.
- a semi-preparative Phenomenex Gemini C18 column (5 ⁇ m, 10 mm ⁇ 250 mm, 110 ⁇ ) was used for preparative RP-HPLC work.
- MS mass spectrometry
- the first approach utilizes chemoselective cleavage of the linear, protected peptide from the solid support with concomitant unmasking of the cysteine sulfhydryl group.
- the protected peptide can then be macrocyclized via a carbodiimide coupling and subsequently deprotected.
- This approach is limited in part by the (i) poor solubilities of the protected peptides and (ii) low macrocyclization efficiencies due to the steric bulk of the protecting groups.
- the resin was treated with piperidine (2 mL of 20% in DMF, 2 ⁇ 10 min) and washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 2 mL).
- DMF 3 ⁇ 2 mL
- acetic anhydride (10 equiv.) and DIPEA (7 equiv.) were dissolved in DMF (2 mL), and the solution was added to the resin and agitated for 15 min.
- the resin was then drained and washed with DMF (2 ⁇ 2 mL).
- the resin washed with diethyl ether (1 ⁇ 2 mL) and dried under vacuum for 48 h.
- the linear peptidyl-resin (70-90 mg) was placed in a dry, three-neck round bottom flask and suspended in anhydrous CH 2 Cl 2 under argon at rt for 15 min.
- Me 2 AlCl (20 equiv., 1 mL of 1 M hexane solution) and anhydrous CH 2 Cl 2 (3 mL) were stirred in a separate, dry round bottom flask under argon for 5 min at 0° C.
- Ethanethiol (EtSH) 60 equiv. was added drop-wise at 0° C., and the solution was stirred for 15 min at 0° C.
- peptide thioester was dissolved in a 60% guanidinium chloride (6 M solution in 0.1 M phosphate buffer):40% ACN solution to a final concentration ranging from 100 ⁇ M to 2 mM. The pH of the solution was then adjusted to 6.8. The peptide was gently agitated using a multi-purpose rotator at 50° C., and cyclization was monitored by analytical RP-HPLC. Upon completion, cyclic peptide was purified by semi-preparative RP-HPLC and lyophilized. The resulting white powder was then dissolved in 1 Mhydrochloric acid (400 ⁇ L) and lyophilized prior to bioanalysis.
- Example 1 Two sets of peptidomimetics, resulting from an N-methyl scan and a peptoid scan of AIP-III, were prepared to assess backbone-amide hydrogen bond interactions and conformational restrictions of the AIP-III scaffold. These peptidomimetics are illustrated in FIG. 4 .
- Peptidomimetic AIP-III derivatives that were not modified at the C-terminus residue were synthesized using Boc-protected, L-leucine pre-loaded PAM resin (0.8 mmol/g).
- AM resin 100 mg, 1.17 mmol/g was swelled in diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA; 10% in CH 2 Cl 2 ; 2 mL) for 10 min. The resin was washed with DIPEA (10% in CH 2 Cl 2 ; 3 ⁇ 1 mL) and dimethylformamide (DMF; 3 ⁇ 2 mL).
- DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
- DMF dimethylformamide
- the resin was washed with DMF (2 ⁇ 2 mL) and CH 2 Cl 2 (2 ⁇ 2 mL), then treated with a solution of acetic anhydride (10 equiv.) and DIPEA (7 equiv.) in DMF for 15 min. The resin was then washed with DMF (2 ⁇ 2 mL) and CH 2 Cl 2 (2 ⁇ 2 mL), followed by chloranil test to determine the absence of free amines (see procedure below).
- the resin 50 mg was first suspended in CH 2 Cl 2 (2 mL) for 30 min at rt and then drained.
- Boc/Fmoc-protected amino acids (4 equiv.), 2-(1H-benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HBTU; 4 equiv.), and DIPEA (6 equiv.) were dissolved in DMF (2 mL). The solution was allowed to pre-activate for 2 min prior to being added to the resin and agitated for 30 min at rt. After each coupling step, the resin was drained and washed with DMF (2 ⁇ 2 mL).
- bromoacetic acid ( equiv.) was dissolved in DMF (2 mL).
- DIC (10 equiv.) was added and the solution was pre-activated for 20 min.
- the solution was added to the resin and the reaction was agitated for 30 min.
- the resin was drained and the procedure was repeated.
- the resin was washed with DMF (2 ⁇ 2 mL) and CH 2 Cl 2 (2 ⁇ 2 mL), followed by chloranil test to determine the reaction completion (see procedure below).
- To couple primary amines to the bromoacetic acid the amine (10 equiv.) was dissolved in DMF (2 mL).
- DIPEA (10 equiv.) was added and the solution was allowed to pre-activate for 1 min prior to being added to the resin and agitated overnight using a multi-purpose rotator at 50° C.
- the resin was washed with DMF (2 ⁇ 2 mL) and CH 2 Cl 2 (2 ⁇ 2 mL), followed by chloranil test to determine the presence of free amines (see procedure below).
- Boc/Fmoc-protected amino acids (4 equiv.), 2-(7-Aza-1H-benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU; 4 equiv.), and DIPEA (4 equiv.) were dissolved in DMF (2 mL). The solution was allowed to pre-activate for 1 min prior to being added to the resin and agitated for 2 h at rt. The resin was washed with DMF (2 ⁇ 2 mL) and CH 2 Cl 2 (2 ⁇ 2 mL), followed by chloranil test to determine the reaction completion (see procedure below). If the test indicated that free amines are still present, the procedure was repeated and the reaction was left overnight at 50° C. After the second coupling cycle, peptide elongation was continued even if the chloranil test indicated that free amines are still present.
- Ethanethiol (60 equiv.) was added drop-wise at 0° C., and the solution was stirred for 15 min at 0° C. This solution was then added to the suspended resin and stirred under argon for 5 h at rt to effect cleavage of the linear peptide as a thioester.
- the cleavage product solution was transferred into a new round bottom flask containing a TFA solution (95% (aq.), 3 mL) and the solvents were removed in vacuo to yield a yellow or orange oil. The resulting oil was subjected again to TFA solution (3 mL, 30 min) and filtered from the resin.
- the resin was washed with TFA solution (1 ⁇ 2 mL) to collect any additional peptide.
- a cooled solution of diethyl ether:hexane (1:1, 40 mL, 0° C.) was added to the filtrate, and the peptide was allowed to precipitate overnight in a freezer at ⁇ 20° C.
- the precipitated peptide solution was centrifuged and the supernatant removed to yield a white solid.
- This solid was dissolved in ACN (50% (aq.)), lyophilized, redissolved in ACN (50% (aq.)) and purified by semi-preparative RP-HPLC. Collected HPLC fractions were lyophilized to yield the peptide thioester as a white powder (5-20% isolated yields).
- peptidomimetic thioester was dissolved in a 60% guanidinium chloride (6 M solution in 0.1 M phosphate buffer):40% ACN solution to a final concentration ranging from 100 ⁇ M to 2 mM. The pH of the solution was then adjusted to 6.8. The peptide was agitated using a multi-purpose rotator at 50° C. for 2 h. The cyclic peptide was purified by semi-preparative RP-HPLC and lyophilized. The resulting white powder was then dissolved in 1M hydrochloric acid (400 ⁇ L) and lyophilized.
- TSST-1 enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay ELISA
- TLB Tryptic soy broth
- BHI brain heart infusion
- the bacterial strains used in this study are listed in Table 2. Bacterial cultures were grown in a standard laboratory incubator at 37° C. with shaking (200 rpm) unless noted otherwise. The bacterial dilutions and incubation periods were chosen in each assay to provide the greatest dynamic range between positive and negative controls for each bacterial strain. Absorbance and fluorescence measurements were obtained using a Biotek Synergy 2 microplate reader using Gen5 data analysis software. All biological assays were performed in triplicate. IC 50 values were calculated using GraphPad Prism software (v. 4.0) using a sigmoidal curve fit.
- the AIP:AgrC complexes will phosphorylate AgrA, which will then bind P3 and transcribe gfp.
- GFP fluorescence can then be quantified to determine the extent of AgrC activation, and in these wild-type strains, will be observable in the absence of an exogenous AgrC modulator.
- the reporter gene assay data revealed several interesting SAR trends for AIP-III, and a number of new, global AgrC inhibitors were uncovered with either comparable if not more potent activities than the known inhibitor tAIP-I D2A.
- AIP:AgrC interactions There are two components to AIP:AgrC interactions: the initial recognition of an AIP by an AgrC receptor and the resultant induction of allosteric changes within AgrC that drives activation.
- two different SAR trends were examined: (i cross-inhibition of AgrC-I, -II, and -IV (namely AIP:AgrC recognition), and (ii) activation of AgrC-III (via allosteric changes).
- AIP-III D-L7 displayed analogous inhibitory activities as the parent AIP-III in groups-I, -II and -IV (within error), suggesting that Leu7 may not enforce stereodefined interactions of AIP-III with AgrC receptors. This observation is congruent with previous findings for AIP-I by Williams and co-workers.[24] Two exceptions to these activity trends are noted. Replacing the endocyclic Phe5 or Leu6 with their D-isomers (in AIP-III D-F5 and AIP-III D-L6) neither maintained nor simply abolished inhibitory activity against one receptor, AgrC-II. These two analogs appeared to activate AgrC-II instead.
- AIP-III D4A Asp4 with alanine
- AIP-III D4A contains the identical mutation as the previously reported global inhibitor, tAIP-I D2A (residue numbering shifted (4a ⁇ 2) due to truncated structure), yet is a ⁇ 10-fold more active inhibitor in each group (Table 3).
- AIP-III D4A represented not only the most active inhibitor identified in this first series of AIP-III derivatives, but is also, to our knowledge, the most potent AgrC inhibitor to be reported.
- b IC 50 values determined by testing AIPs over a range of concentrations (200 fM ⁇ 10 ⁇ M) or b1 (2.5 pM ⁇ 10 ⁇ M). c Dose response curve did not reach 100% inhibition over the concentrations tested. d IC 50 values are between 100 nM ⁇ 1 ⁇ M. e Inhibition dose response curve upturned at higher concentrations. f Dose response curve revealed agonism and no antagonism. g Control compound. h No inhibition was observed at the concentrations tested.
- AIP-III D-L7 maintained the agonistic activity of the parent AIP-III, while AIP-III L7A was largely inactive, similar to the AIP-III F5A and AIP-III L6A mutants. This disparate activity trend suggests that Leu7 may not play as a major of a role in AIP-III:AgrC-III interactions as Phe5 and Leu6.
- Table 3 also summarizes the activities of these control peptides and the peptido-mimetics of FIG. 4 .
- exocyclic residues of AIPs are required for cognate activation but not receptor recognition.
- peptidomimetics with modifications to the exocyclic tail residues had activities similar to the parent AIP-III.
- AIP-III nN2 could not be directly evaluated, but note that the bicyclic AIP-III nN2 DKP significantly lost ability to inhibit AgrC-I (>20-fold change).
- AIP-III nF5 was the most potent inhibitor identified for any group in these studies and displayed enhanced potency for AgrC-IV only (versus AIP-III: 10-fold increased potency for AgrC-IV, within error for AgrC-I, and 13-fold reduction for AgrC-II).
- Leu7 replacement of Leu7 with the N-methylated or peptoid analog abolished inhibition where peptoid insertion resulted in an AgrC-II agonist.
- the combined results indicate that the side chain of Phe5 (but not the backbone) is the important component of this residue, and the backbone is the important component of Leu7. Based on these results, the AIP segment spanning from the Phe5 ⁇ -carbon to the nitrogen atom of Leu7 appears to be the basis for AgrC recognition.
- the SAR analysis also provided information related to AgrC-III activation by AIP-III.
- Agonism of AgrC-III was not detected for any of the backbone-modified analogs, indicating that hydrogen bonding throughout the entire sequence is important for activation.
- the utilization of wild-type bacteria in our assay prevents accurate assessment of this phenomenon.
- the 13 peptidomimetic analogs of FIG. 4 only AIP-III nN2 DKP was found to be an AgrC-III inhibitor. This analog also significantly reduced TSST-1 production by a group-III S. aureus strain in low ⁇ M concentrations.
- the intolerance of AgrC-I to changes at Asp4 may be attributable to the sequence of the cognate AIP that has an Asp residue at the same position.
- an AgrC-IV selective inhibitor, AIP-III N-Me-L6, was identified on N-methylation of Leu6 of AIP-III.
- the selectivity obtained through this subtle change in the AIP structure emphasizes the specificity of the interactions between the AIPs and the AgrC receptors.
- two partially selective inhibitors, AIP-III nF5 and AIP-III nN2 DKP (IC 50 values vary significantly between the groups) were identified.
- Group-selective inhibitors for example, are useful as research reagents to study the agr QS circuit of S. aureus in mixed bacterial milieu.
- Group-selective inhibitors provide a method to temporally evaluate mixed strains to probe not only strain-strain competition, but also to assess the role of QS timing on a strain's success or failure in such competition
- IC 50 values of the second-generation AIP-III analogues against AgrC I-IV determined using S. aureus fluorescence reporter strains.
- a AgrC-I AgrC-II AgrC-III AgrC-IV Compound name Sequence IC 50 (nM) b IC 50 (nM) b IC 50 (nM) b IC 50 (nM) b AIP-III I1A/N2A A-A-(C-D-F-L-L) 7.40 4.38 2.60 5.41 AIP-III I1A/D4A A-N-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.328 2.35 0.280 0.101 AIP-III N2A/D4A I-A-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.331 0.204 0.0657 0.0221 AIP-III I1A/N2A/D4A A-A-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.304 0.604 0.0734 0.0161 tAIP
- Introducing a D4A mutation along with these exocyclic alanine mutations yielded analogs with antagonistic activities analogous to the AIP-III D4A parent mutant, regardless of other mutations (within error for all except AIP-III I1A/D4A against AgrC-II, with a ⁇ 5-fold change), indicating that the inclusion of D4A may convert every AIP-III mutant to cross-group AgrC inhibitor.
- AIP-III Four elongated AIP-III analogs with either an acetyl, glycine, alanine, or tyrosine extension at the N-terminus of AIP-III.
- the tyrosine-extended AIP-III (Y-AIP-III) was a moderate antagonist of AgrC-III in the gfp-reporter assay.
- the acetylated and glycine variants (Ac-AIP-III and G-AIP-III) were largely inactive in AgrC-III, and the alanine-extended AIP (A-AIP-III) was actually a partial agonist of AgrC-III instead.
- Ac-AIP-III When evaluated for modulatory activity in the non-cognate AgrC receptors, Ac-AIP-III was the least active (>200 nM for group-I and -IV and 44.3 nM for group-II), implying that a free N-terminus is important for recognition. None of the amino acid AIP-III analogs showed improved inhibition compared to the parent AIP-III, and G-AIP-III was the least potent extended amino acid analog overall. Interestingly, the A-AIP-III, but not Y-AIP-III- (Tyr being first amino acid in the native AIP-IV octapeptide sequence), actually displayed partial agonism in AgrC-IV.
- Peptide stock solutions were diluted with DMSO in serial dilutions (either 1:3, 1:5, or 1:10), and 2 ⁇ L of the diluted solution was added to each of the wells in a black 96-well microtiter plate.
- An overnight culture of S. aureus gfp strain was diluted 1:50 with fresh TSB (pH 7.35).
- a 198- ⁇ L portion of diluted culture was added to each well of the microtiter plate containing peptide. Plates were incubated at 37° C. for 24 h. Fluorescence (EX 500 nm/EM 540 nm) and OD 600 of each well was then recorded using a plate reader and IC 50 values were calculated.
- AIP-III D4A stock solution was added to wells in a black 96-well microtiter plate to final concentrations of 2 nM (group-I and -II strains) or 0.3 nM (group-III and -IV strains).
- Native AIP (I-IV) stock solutions were diluted with DMSO in serial dilutions (1:3 dilutions) and added to the wells containing AIP-III D4A.
- the fluorescence assay was carried out as described above in the four respective S. aureus reporter strains.
- Wild-type strains of S. aureus groups-I-IV were treated with compounds to be tested and the cultures were then assessed for hemolysin activity.
- Rabbit red blood cells were incubated with peptide-treated bacterial cultures ( ⁇ 15 min) in a microtiter plate, after which the samples were pelleted by centrifugation. The culture supernatant was then transferred to new plates, and the concentration of free heme (directly correlated with red blood cell lysis) was quantified by measuring absorbance at 420 nm. Similar to the gfp-reporter assays outlined above, the native AIPs (I-IV) and the previously reported global inhibitor tAIP-I D2A as controls in the hemolysis assays. Table 5 summarizes the hemolysis assay data.
- aureus QS inhibitor identified in the gfp-reporter assay AIP-III D4A
- AIP-III D4A inhibited hemolysis in all four groups at subnanomolar concentrations (IC 50 value ⁇ 0.2 nM).
- This peptide was three-fold more active than the previously reported global inhibitor, tAIP-I D2A, in the hemolysis assay in the group IV strain; more strikingly, it was 40-fold more active in the group-II strain.
- Peptide stock solutions were diluted with DMSO in serial dilutions (either 1:3, 1:5, or 1:10 dilutions).
- 2 ⁇ L of diluted peptide solution was added to each of the wells in a 96-well microtiter plate.
- An overnight culture of S. aureus wild-type strain was diluted with fresh TSB (pH 7.35) (1:10, 1:25 or 1:100, assay conditions dependent on strain (see Table 7).
- a 198- ⁇ L portion of the diluted culture was added to each well of the microtiter plate containing peptides.
- TSST-1 is a hallmark QS phenotype S. aureus group-III.
- the four most potent AgrC inhibitors identified above (AIP-III D4A, tAIP-III D2A, AIP-III N 2 A/D4A, and AIPIIII1A/N 2 A/D4A) were evaluated for the capability of reducing the production of TSST-1 in group-III S. aureus .
- a wild-type group-III S. aureus strain (MN8) known to produce TSST-1 in the presence of each AIP-III analog (at 1 and 10 nM), and quantitated toxin production using a standard sandwich-type ELISA assay with a commercially available anti-TSST-1 antibody.
- results of these assays are shown in FIG. 3 , and show that all four AIP-III analogs are capable of strongly inhibiting TSST production (by >80%) in this group-III S. aureus strain at 10 nM. Moreover, two analogs, AIP-III D4A and tAIP-III D2A, maintained 80% reduction of TSST-1 levels at 1 nM.
- the TSST-1 ELISA protocol was based in part on the procedure supplied by the toxin producer (Toxin Technologies, Inc.), with some modifications.
- Peptide stock solutions (AIP-III analog or cyclic dipeptide control) were diluted with DMSO to the desired concentration, and 20 ⁇ L of the diluted solutions was added to 15-mL Falcon tubes.
- An overnight culture of S. aureus MN8 was diluted 1:100 with fresh BHI (pH 7.35), and a 1-mL portion of diluted culture was added to each Falcon tube containing peptide. The cultures were incubated at 37 ⁇ C for 24 h.
- rabbit polyclonal anti-TSST-1 IgG (100 ⁇ L, 10 ⁇ g/mL in coating buffer (0.01M sodium carbonate, pH 9.6)) was added to a 96-well ELISA plate and incubated with shaking (200 rpm) in a humid chamber at 37° C. for 18 h. The ELISA plate was then washed 3 ⁇ (300 ⁇ L each, PBS solution containing 0.05% Tween-20, PBS-Tween).
- bovine serum albumin (BSA, 1% in PBS-Tween, 100 ⁇ L) was added to each well and incubated for 15 min at rt, after which it was washed 3 ⁇ again with PBS-Tween (300 ⁇ L each).
- the bacterial cultures were centrifuged to pellet the cells (10 min, 25° C., 450 g), and the supernatants were sterile filtered.
- the supernatants were diluted 1:10 in normal rabbit serum (NRS, 1% in PBS-Tween) and incubated for 15 min at rt.
- the incubated solutions were further diluted using PBS-Tween to a total dilution of 1:100 to 1:2,000.
- the diluted supernatant samples (100 ⁇ L) and TSST-1 standards with known concentrations (ranging from 10 ng/mL to 0.32 ng/mL, 100 ⁇ L) were added to the ELISA plate and incubated with shaking (200 rpm) in a humid chamber at 37° C. for 2 h. After incubation, the plate was washed 3 ⁇ with PBS-Tween, and anti-TSST-1 IgG horseradish peroxidase conjugate (100 ⁇ L, 3.33 ⁇ g/mL) was added and incubated with shaking (200 rpm) in a humid chamber at 37° C. for 1 h.
- the plate was washed 5 ⁇ with PBS-Tween, after which 2,2′-azinobis(3-ethylbenzthiazoline-sulfonic acid) (ABTS solution, 100 ⁇ L) was added and incubated at rt for 15 min. Absorbance at 405 nm was measured using a plate reader, and a TSST-1 standard curve was constructed for each assay plate using the data of the TSST-1 reference standards. (The R 2 of linear regression analysis for these data was >0.99.) The TSST-1 concentration in the test samples were then determined from the regression equation and presented as a percentage of the TSST-1 concentration in the untreated cultures.
- ABTS solution 2,2′-azinobis(3-ethylbenzthiazoline-sulfonic acid)
- Peptidomimetic compounds of FIG. 4 that displayed ⁇ 100% inhibition of gfp production in the wild-type strains were assessed for agonistic activity using a set of S. aureus group-I agr-null strains each carrying a plasmid containing a P3-blaZ fusion (to confer ⁇ -lactamase activity in response to AgrC activation) and agrCA from groups-I, -II, -III, or -IV. [46, 49]. None of peptidomimetics of FIG. 4 were able to activate the non-cognate AgrC receptors in the activation assay. Only the ability of the N-methyl and peptoid scans of AIP-III to activate the AgrC-III receptor is presented in Table 8.
- N-methylation of Asn2 produced an analog with enhanced activity compared to AIP-III (Table 8), combined with the relatively high antagonistic activity of AIP-III nN2 DKP, this result suggests that N-alkylation of Asn2 is beneficial for AgrC-III interactions.
- N-methylation of Cys3 resulted in an analog with reduced activity compared to AIP-III (>10-fold change, Table 5), further highlighting the importance of this residue for effective AgrC receptor recognition. Modifying Phe5 did not hamper the ability of the resulting analogs to activate AgrC-III (Table 8). This result is consistent with the hypothesis that the AIP segment spanning from the Phe5 ⁇ -carbon to the nitrogen atom of Leu7 is the basis for AgrC recognition.
- Peptide stock solutions were diluted with DMSO in serial dilutions (1:5), and 2 ⁇ L of the diluted solution was added to each of the wells in a clear 96-well microtiter plate.
- a 50- ⁇ L portion of culture was added to each well of the microtiter plate containing peptide. Plates were incubated at 37° C. for 1 h.
- OD 600 of each well was recorded using a plate reader, followed by the addition of sodium azide (5 ⁇ L of 50 mM solution) and Nitrocefin solution (50 ⁇ L of 132 ⁇ g/mL in 0.1 M sodium phosphate buffer, pH 5.8). The plate was shaken in an incubator at 37° C. in the dark for 20 min, the absorbance (495 nm) of each well was then recorded and EC 50 values were calculated.
- Example 8 Synthesis of Compounds of Formula V and Biological Assessment of Inhibition of AgrC Receptor Groups
- FIG. 5 illustrates the naming scheme for certain compounds of Formula V which is used in Table 9.
- Table 9 provides a comparison of activity of certain compounds of formula V for inhibition of AgrC Receptor Groups of S. aureus .
- Table 9 lists % activation for each listed compound for AgrC groups I-IV. Percent activation is a comparison of fluorescence measurements (performed essentially as described in Example 4) of treated bacteria to non-treated wild-type bacteria (S. Aureus ) which produce native-ligand which activates QS in the absence of an inhibitor; a lower % activation indicates more potent inhibition. This study identifies several compounds which potently inhibit AgrC receptors at the nM level.
- n3LF is a global inhibitor of all four AgrC receptors.
- the compound designated n2LF is a selective group-II inhibitor.
- the compounds d designated n5LF and n7LF are selective group-III inhibitors. Structures of certain compounds of formula V are listed below indicating IC 50 values for inhibition of listed AgrC receptors:
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Biotechnology (AREA)
- Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
- Zoology (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Cell Biology (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
- Virology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Microbiology (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
Abstract
Compounds that affect quorum sensing (QS) in Staphylococcus aureus and related Staphylococcus species (e.g., S. epidermidis). Compounds which modulate one or more of the four AgrC receptors of Staphylococcus species, particularly of Staphylococcus aureus. Modulation includes inhibition or activation of one or more of these four AgrC receptors. These compounds are useful for bacterial interference and are useful for treating bacterial infections, particularly staphylococcal infection. Treatment can include combination of one or more of the compounds of the invention in combination with one or more antibiotics.
Description
- This application is a divisional of and claims the benefit of co-pending U.S. Ser. No. 14/109,193, filed Dec. 17, 2013, which is a continuation of and claims the benefit of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/792,977, filed Mar. 11, 2013, now abandoned. The entirety of each application is incorporated herein by reference.
- This invention was made with government support under N00014-07-1-0255 awarded by the NAVY/ONR. The government has certain rights in the invention.
- Many bacteria utilize small molecule or peptidic signals to assess their local population densities in a process termed quorum sensing (QS). [1-3] This chemical signaling process effectively allows bacteria to “count” themselves and behave as a group at high cell number. While the specifics may vary between species, QS circuits share general organizing principles: bacteria produce, secrete, and detect signal molecules referred to as autoinducers. At high population densities in a given environment, the autoinducers will reach a sufficiently high concentration to bind and activate their cognate (intracellular or extracellular) receptors. Signal:receptor binding then alters the expression of genes involved in bacterial group behaviors, such as swarming, sporulation, bioluminescence, conjugation, biofilm formation, and virulence factor production. [4-6] These phenotypes can have widespread and sometimes devastating effects on human health, agriculture, and the environment.[7,8] For example, pathogenic bacteria utilize QS to launch synchronized attacks on their hosts only after they have achieved a high cell density, thereby overwhelming the defense mechanisms of the host.[9-11] As several prevalent human pathogens (e.g., Staphylococcus aureus) use QS to control virulence, QS has received considerable recent attention as a new anti-infective target.[12] There has been significant interest in the development of non-native ligands (e.g., small molecule and peptides) capable of blocking QS pathways. In contrast to antibiotics, which target bacterial pathways that are essential for survival, QS antagonists provide an alternative anti-infective therapy that does not place selective pressure on the bacterial population to develop resistance.[13,14] This is especially important in the case of S. aureus, which rapidly develops resistance to antibiotics, including resistance to the once last-resort antibiotic vancomycin.[15]
- S. aureus is a Gram-positive bacterium that uses QS to establish both acute and chronic infections.[16,17] This pathogen produces an impressive arsenal of virulence factors, including tissue-degrading enzymes, immune evasion factors, and pore-forming toxins (hemolysins), all of which are regulated by the accessory gene regulator (agr) QS system.[18-20] The agr system has four components, termed AgrA-D, as illustrated in
FIG. 1A , and is centered on the autoinducing peptide (AIP) QS signal. AgrB is an integral membrane endopeptidase that converts the precursor of the AIP signal, AgrD, to the mature AIP. This conversion involves cyclization of AgrD via a cysteine sulfhydryl group and its C-terminus to form the AIP as a 16-atom thiolactone macrocycle with an N-terminal exocyclic tail (shown inFIG. 1B ). AgrB is also involved in the secretion of AIP across the cell membrane. Once a threshold concentration of AIP is reached in a given environment, the AIP ligand binds to its target receptor AgrC, a transmembrane histidine kinase. The AIP:AgrC complex acts to phosphorylate the response regulator, AgrA. Phosphorylated AgrA then binds to the P2 and P3 promoters to autoinduce the agr system and upregulate RNAIII transcription.[21] RNAIII thus represents the main effector of the agr system and regulates the expression of many virulence factors and surface proteins associated with biofilm production.[22] - There is a hypervariable region within the S. aureus agr operon that has led to the classification of four agr specificity groups of S. aureus (I-IV) with distinct AIP and AgrC sequences.[23-25] The structures of the four AIP signals (I-IV) are shown in
FIG. 1B . The four AIP signals have a conserved 16-atom thiolactone macrocycle, and AIPs I and IV share a nearly identical primary sequence, while AIP-II and AIP-III have more dissimilar primary sequences. - The four different agr groups have been correlated with specific disease types: group-I and -II are associated with the majority of invasive infections,[26-28] while group-IV is considered rare and limited to exfoliative toxin-related syndromes.[26] Group-III S. aureus has recently been reported to be the most abundant group in nasal carriage cases and to be predominately responsible for toxic shock syndrome (TSS) in humans.[26,27] Toxic shock syndrome toxin-1 (TSST-1) is the causative agent all cases of menstrual TSS and most cases of nonmenstrual TSS.[26,29] Notably, TSST-1 production is directly regulated by the agr-III QS system (
FIG. 1A ).[18,29,30] Methods to inhibit the agr-III system in S. aureus could provide new insights into and therapeutic strategies for this deadly disease. - QS is dependent on autoinducer:receptor binding, and the development of chemical agents capable of blocking this binding event have been a focus of considerable research.[31-33] Both small molecules and macromolecules have been utilized to block native autoinducer binding, largely in Gram-negative bacteria.[34,35] Such abiotic agents can be useful in anti-infective treatments.[36-38] The development of small molecules that affect AgrC signaling in S. aureus has proceeded more slowly.
- Janda et al. [35,44] have recently reported a complimentary strategy based on antibodies that sequester the AIP ligand away from AgrC and effectively “quench” QS in group-IV S. aureus. McCormick and co-workers have reported that naturally occurring cyclic dipeptides produced by Lactobacillus reuteri can modulate the agr system in S. aureus. [29]
- Early studies of the AgrC systems reported that each of the native AIPs were capable of cross-inhibiting the other three, non-cognate receptors.[23, 45-47] This activity was suggested to provide each group some competitive advantage when establishing an infection, and to explain in part the predominance of a single S. aureus group in many infection types.[23,48] Given the prevalence of group-I and -II systems in clinically relevant infections, AIP-I and AIP-II have so far received the most scrutiny for the design of AgrC modulators.[24, 45, 46, 49-52]
- Studies by Muir, Novick, Williams, and co-workers examined the structure activity relationship (SAR) of AIP-I and AIP-II, [53-55] and reported certain non-native mimetics of these peptides that were capable of inhibiting both their cognate and non-cognate AgrC receptors in S. aureus. There are two components to AIP:AgrC interactions: initial recognition and induction of an allosteric response that drives activation. The core AIP-II macrocycle was reported to be important for recognition because linear native peptides and mimetics of AIP-II were completely inactive.[45] In addition, these studies reported that the two structural elements of AIPs, the macrocycle and the exocyclic tail, are responsible for AgrC:AIP recognition and AgrC activation, respectively. [55] Interactions of AIPs with non-cognate AgrC receptors were reported to be inhibitory, namely through AIP:AgrC recognition, alterations to the exocyclic tails did not significantly affect cross-inhibition. The AIP macrocycle alone is reported sufficient for cross-group inhibitory activity. Within the AIP-I and AIP-II macrocycles, the hydrophobic residues at the C-termini were reported to be essential for cognate and non-cognate AgrC recognition.[24,45,49] Consistent with these observations, Muir et al. reported several potent and global inhibitors of all four AgrC receptors.[49] The most active inhibitor was reported to be a truncated version of AIP-I that lacked an exocyclic tail and had an aspartic acid to alanine mutation in the macrocyclic core (tAIP-I D2A):
- Peptidomimetics are a powerful tool for studying and understanding SARs of peptides and proteins. [67] Modifications can be introduced to gather information regarding the importance of specific amide and hydrogen bonds within a peptide backbone and to identify conformational restrictions and structural elements important to overall activity while simultaneously enhancing pharmacological properties. [68-73]Peptidomimetics, with enhanced metabolic stability and permeability, can be useful as drug leads. [67, 74] For instance, N-methyl amino acids and N-substituted glycine derivatives (peptoids) can be inserted into or formed into peptides generating fully or partially N-methylated peptides, peptoids or peptide-peptoid (peptomer) hybrids which can be used to provide valuable SAR insights.
- For example, Muir and co-workers [51] performed a N-methyl scan of the truncated version of AIP-II pointing to the utility of such studies for AIP SAR.
- The SARs that dictate the activity of AIP-III remain largely unknown, and mimetics thereof are yet to be reported.
- Molecules which affect QS in group-III S. aureus are of particular interest because of the prevalence of infections of these group-III species in human TSS.
- This invention provides compounds that are useful for bacterial interference. The invention provides compounds that are useful in the treatment of bacterial infection and related conditions. More specifically the invention provides compounds that are useful in the treatment of “staph” infections (infections caused by Staphylococcus bacteria) and particularly infections of Staphylococcus aureus.
- The invention provides compounds that affect quorum sensing (QS) in Staphylococcus aureus and related Staphylococcus species (e.g., S. epidermidis). More specifically the invention provides compounds which modulate one or more of the four AgrC receptors of Staphylococcus species, particularly of Staphylococcus aureus. Modulation includes inhibition or activation of one or more of these four AgrC receptors.
- The invention provides compounds which inhibit one or more of the four AgrC receptors of Staphylococcus species, particularly of Staphylococcus aureus. In specific embodiments, compounds which inhibit three or four of the AgrC receptors are provided. In additional embodiments, compounds which inhibit all four of the AgrC receptors are provided. In yet additional embodiments, compounds which inhibit all four of the AgrC receptors with picomolar IC50 values are provided.
- The invention provides compounds which activate one or more of the four AgrC receptors of Staphylococcus species, particularly of Staphylococcus aureus. In specific embodiments, the invention provides compounds which activate AgrC-III.
- Certain compounds of the invention block hemolysis by wild-type Staphylococcus aureus, which is a virulence phenotype under the control of QS. Certain compounds of the invention block hemolysis by wild-type Staphylococcus aureus at picomolar levels. Certain compounds of the invention reduce TSST-1 production levels in a wild-type Staphylococcus aureus group-III strain. Certain compounds of the invention reduce TSST-1 production levels in a wild-type Staphylococcus aureus group-III strain by over 80%.
- In specific embodiments, compounds of the invention are useful for the treatment of infections involving Staphylococcus aureus group-III strains and particularly for the treatment of Toxic shock syndrome.
- In specific embodiments, compounds of the invention modulate biofilm formation by Staphylococcus species, particularly Staphylococcus aureus and more particularly Staphylococcus aureus group-III strains.
- The invention provides compounds of formula I:
- and salts thereof where:
L is adivalent linker moiety 3 to 10 atoms in length;
Z is adivalent linker moiety 3 to 14 atoms in length;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group;
R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; where, when R1 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R6 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and when R2 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R7 is a hydrogen or a methyl group;
R10 is hydrogen or a methyl group;
R5 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl group, an optionally substituted heterocyclic or R5 is: -
- H2N—CHR12—, H2N—CHR12—CO—NR14—, H2N—CHR12—CO—NR14—CHR12—, R15—CO—NR14—, or R15—CO—NR14—CHR12, where each R12 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; R14 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; and R15 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group where, when R5 is H2N—CHR12—CO—NR14— and R12 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl, R14 is hydrogen or a methyl group.
- The term “atoms in length” refers to the shortest number of atoms directly bonded between the points of attachment of L and Z in the formulas herein. If there are two or more possible ways to calculate the number of atoms bonded between the attachment points, the shortest number of atoms is that which is intended to be limited by the recited range.
- Substitution when present includes substitution with one or more non-hydrogen groups selected an from halogen, hydroxyl, alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, amino-substituted alkyl having 1-4 carbon atoms, alkoxy having 1-3 carbon atoms, amino, alkylamino having 1-3 carbon atoms, dialkyl amino where the alkyl group has 1-3 carbon atoms, aryl, haloalkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, phenyl, benzyl, phenoxy, benzyloxy, oxo (═O), sulfhydryl, alkylthio having 1-3 carbon atoms, —CO2R where R is hydrogen or an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, —COR, where R is H or an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, —CO—NR2, where each R is independently hydrogen or alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms, azido (N3—), nitro, cyano, isocyano, thiocyano, or isothiocyano. Substitution of aryl or heteroaryl groups include substitution in which substituents on two ring atoms together with the ring atom or atoms to which they are attached form a 5-8 member ring which can contain 0 (carbocyclic) or 1-3 heteroatoms (particularly N, O or S).
- Substitution of alkyl groups includes substitution with one or more optionally substituted aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, carbocyclic groups or heterocyclic groups, where substitution if present includes substitution with one or more halogens, hydroxyls, alkyl groups, amino, alkylamino or dialkyl amino groups.
- In specific embodiments, L is a divalent moiety —(CH2)l—, where l is 3-8 and one, two or three of the —CH2— moieties therein are optionally replaced with —O—, —S—, —CO—, or —NH—, and/or a —CH2—CH2— therein is optionally replaced with a double bond, a phenylene moiety or a cyclohexylene moiety.
- In specific embodiments, L is —(CH2)1-4—S—CO—, —(CH2)1-4—O—CO—, —(CH2)1-4—NH—CO—, —(CH2)1-2—O—(CH2)1-2—CO—, —(CH2)2-5—CO—, —CO—(CH2)1-4—CO—, or —CH2—NHCONH—CH2—.
- In more specific embodiments, L is —CH2—X—CO—, where X is, S, O or NH.
- In more specific embodiments, L is —CH2—S—CO—, or —CH2—CH2—S—CO—.
- In specific embodiments, Z is selected from:
-
- (i) a —NR9—(CH2)n—CO— linker, where n is 1 to 9;
- (ii) a —NR9—(CH2)n—CO—NR8—CH(R3)—CO— linker; or
- (ii) a —NR9—CH(R4)—CO—NR8—CH(R3)—CO— linker,
wherein R3 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl group or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group;
R4 is hydrogen, or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms;
R9 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl group, or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group; wherein when R3 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R8 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and when R4 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R9 is a hydrogen or a methyl group. In specific embodiments, n is 1-7 or n is 2-6, n is 5-8, n is 5-7 or n is 3.
- In specific embodiments R3 is an aryl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments R3 is an aryl-substituted methyl group. In specific embodiments R3 is an optionally substituted benzyl group. In specific embodiments R3 is a 4-OH-subsituted benzyl group. In specific embodiments, R3 is a heteroaryl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments, R3 is an indolyl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments R8 is an aryl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments R8 is an aryl-substituted methyl group. In specific embodiments R8 is an optionally substituted benzyl group. In specific embodiments R8 is a 4-OH-subsituted benzyl group. In specific embodiments, R8 is a heteroaryl-substituted alkyl group. In specific embodiments, R8 is an indolyl-substituted alkyl group.
- In specific embodiments, Z is —NH—(CH2)n—CO—, where n is 1-7, n is 1-5, n is 1 or n is 2.
- In specific embodiments, Z is —NR9—CH(R4)—CO—NR8—CH(R3)—CO—. In specific embodiments, R3 is a hydrogen and R8 is a group other than a hydrogen. In specific embodiments, R4 is a hydrogen and R9 is a group other than a hydrogen. In specific embodiments, R8 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and R3 is an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group. In specific embodiments, R9 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and R4 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- In specific embodiments, Z is:
- In specific embodiments, R3 is hydrogen and R8 is independently selected from an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group. More specifically R8 is an optionally substituted aryl group. More specifically R8 is an optionally substituted phenyl group. More specifically R8 is an aryl or heteroaryl-substituted alkyl group. More specifically R8 is an aryl or heteroaryl-substituted methyl group. More specifically, R8 is an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl. In specific embodiments, R8 or R9 can be a substituted phenyl ring or benzyl ring in which two ring substituents together form a 5- or 6-member saturated or unsaturated ring having 1 or 2 nitrogens, oxygens or both. In specific embodiments, R8 or R9 can independently be piperonyl groups.
- In specific embodiments, R4 is hydrogen, or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms; and R9 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group. In an embodiment, R8 and R9 are both hydrogens. In an embodiment, R9 is hydrogen or methyl and R4 is hydrogen, methyl, or —CH2—COOH. In an embodiment, R9 is hydrogen, methyl or —CH2—COOH and R4 is hydrogen or methyl. In an embodiment, R1 and R2 are independently alkyl groups having 2-6 carbon atoms and R6 and R7 are hydrogens.
- The invention provides a method for regulating virulence in Staphylococcus which comprises the step of contacting the bacterium or a biofilm of said bacterium with one or more compounds of formulas I, IA or II. In specific embodiments, virulence is attenuated.
- In a specific embodiment, the invention provides a method of inhibiting biofilm formation or for dispersing an already formed biofilm by contacting the bacterium or biofilm with a compound of formula I. In a specific embodiment, the invention provides a method of inhibiting biofilm formation or for dispersing an already formed biofilm by contacting the bacterium or biofilm with a compound of formula III.
- In another aspect, the invention provides an improved solid-phase synthesis protocol for the synthesis of certain cyclic peptides that involves a chemoselective thiol-thioester exchange in the macrocyclization step. This method is illustrated in examples herein and is useful for the synthesis of compounds of this invention.
- The invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically effective amount of one or more of the compounds of formulas herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In specific embodiments, the one or more compounds exhibit activation of an AgrC receptor. In specific embodiments, the one or more compounds exhibit activation of the AgrC receptor. In specific embodiments, the one or more compounds exhibit inhibition of an AgrC receptor. In specific embodiments, the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically effective amount of two or more of the compounds of formulas herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In a specific embodiment, the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically effective amount of two or more of the compounds of formulas herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier wherein the two or more compounds exhibit differences in inhibition or activation of the AgrC receptors. More specifically, in such compositions the two or more compounds exhibit group-selective inhibition for one or more of the AgrC receptors.
- Other embodiments and aspects of the invention will become apparent on review of the following detailed description, drawings and examples.
-
FIGS. 1A-B provides a schematic illustration of the agr quorum sensing circuit in S. aureus. (FIG. 1A ) (a) The precursor peptide AgrD is processed by AgrB. (b) The mature AIP signal is secreted across the cell membrane. (c) AIP binds the extracellular domain of AgrC. (d) The histidine kinase domain of AgrC phosphorylates AgrA. (e) AgrA binds the P2 and P3 promoters to autoactivate the agr system and upregulate RNAIII transcription. (f) In selected S. aureus strains, RNAIII promotes the production of toxic shock syndrome toxin-1 (TSST-1).FIG. 1B provides the structures and sequences of the four AIP signals (IIV) corresponding to the four S. aureus groups. -
FIGS. 2A-2D provides a set of four competition dose response agonism curves (A-D) for the native AIPs (I-IV) in the presence of AIP-III D4A at 2 nM (group-I (2A) and group-11(2B)) or 0.3 nM (group-III (2C) and group-IV(2D)) in the group-I-IV fluorescence reporter strains. Error bars indicate standard error of the mean of triplicate values. -
FIG. 3 is a graph illustrating attenuation of TSST-1 production in wild-type group-III S. aureus (MN8) using selected compounds of the invention. Bacteria were either untreated (black bar, 1), treated with AIP analogs at 10 nM (light gray bars, 2) or 1 nM (white bars, 3), or treated with previously reported cyclic dipeptides at 100 μM (dark gray bars, 4). TSST-1 concentrations are presented as percentage of the TSST-1 concentration in untreated cultures. -
FIG. 4 illustrates exemplary peptidomimetics of this invention. -
FIG. 5 illustrates exemplary compounds of this invention of formula V. - This invention is based at least in part on the synthesis of structural variants of the AIP-III cyclic peptide and assessment of the activity of API-III structural variants for modulation of one or more of the four AgrC receptors of Staphylococcus aureus. Structural variants include those generated by alanine, D-amino acid, N-methylated amino acid and peptoid scans of AIP-III. Additional structural variants examined include double- and triple mutated variants, amino-truncated and amino-elongated variants. Compounds have been identified which inhibit one or more of the AgrC receptors and more specifically which inhibit all four of the AgrC receptors at picomolar IC50 values. Compounds which inhibit AgrC receptors also blocked hemolysis by wild-type S. aureus group I-IV strains. AgrC receptor inhibitors were also identified which attenuated the production of toxic shock syndrome toxin-1 (TSST-1), a QS phenotype in group III S. aureus infections. Compounds which exhibit group-selective inhibition of only one or two agr QS groups were also identified. Additionally, compounds which activate the AgrC-III receptor were identified.
- The invention provides compounds of formula I:
- and salts thereof where:
L is adivalent linker moiety 3 to 6 atoms in length;
Z is adivalent linker moiety 3 to 10 atoms in length;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group;
R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; where, when R1 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R6 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and when R2 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R7 is a hydrogen or a methyl group;
R10 is hydrogen or a methyl group; and
R5 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl group or R5 is: -
- H2N—CHR12—, H2N—CHR12—CO—NR14—, H2N—CHR12—CO—NR14—CHR12—, R15—CO—NR14—, or R15—CO—NR14—CHR12—, where each R12 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; R14 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; and R15 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group where, when R5 is H2N—CHR12—CO—NR14— and R12 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl, R14 is hydrogen or a methyl group.
- In specific embodiments, R5 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms. In specific embodiments, R12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH2—CO—NH2 group. In specific embodiments, R14 is a methyl group. R12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH2—CO—NH2 group and R14 is methyl. In specific embodiments, R5 is the dipeptidyl moiety A-A-, I-A-, A-N—, or I—NMeN.
- The term “atoms in length” refers to the shortest number of atoms directly bonded between the points of attachment of L and Z in the formulas herein. If there are two or more possible ways to calculate the number of atoms bonded between the attachment points, the shortest number of atoms bonded between the two points is that which is intended to be limited by the recited range. For example, the linker —CO—(CH2)5—CO— is 7 atoms in length (the ═O atoms are not directly bonded between the points of attachment.
- Compounds of the invention do not include the naturally occurring AIP-I, AIP-II, AIP-III or AIP-IV peptides. Compounds of the invention do not include tAIP-I D2A. In a specific embodiment, the compound of the invention is not the cyclic thioester (C-A-F-LL).
- The invention also provides compounds of formula IA:
- and salts thereof, where variable are as defined for formula I above.
- In a specific embodiment, of formula I or IA, R6 and R7 are both H and R1 and R2 are alkyl groups having 3 to 6 carbon atoms. In a specific embodiment of formula IA, Z is
- More specifically in this embodiment, R3 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; R4 is hydrogen, or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms; and R9 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; wherein when R3 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R8 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and when R4 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R9 is a hydrogen or a methyl group. More specifically in this embodiment, R8 and R9 are both hydrogens. More specifically in this embodiment, R9 is hydrogen or methyl and R4 is hydrogen, methyl, or —CH2—COOH. More specifically in this embodiment, R9 is hydrogen, methyl or —CH2—COOH and R4 is hydrogen or methyl. More specifically in this embodiment, R8 is hydrogen or methyl and R3 is hydrogen, an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl. More specifically in this embodiment, R8 is an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, and R3 is hydrogen or methyl. More specifically in this embodiment, R1 and R2 are independently alkyl groups having 2-6 carbon atoms and R6 and R7 are hydrogens.
- The invention provides compounds of formula IIA:
- where L, R5, and R10 are as defined above;
R6, R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen or methyl;
R1 and R2 are selected from unsubstituted alkyl groups having 3-6 carbon atoms;
R4 is an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms; and
R3 is an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heterocyclic group or an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms substituted with an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocyclic group, where substitution if present is substitution with one or more halogens, or —OH groups. - In specific embodiments of formula IIA, L is —CH2—X—CO—, where X is S, N or O.
- In specific embodiments of formula IIA, L is —CH2—S—CO—.
- In specific embodiments of formula IIA, R4 is a methyl group.
- In specific embodiments of formula IIA, R3 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms substituted with an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocyclic group.
- In specific embodiments of formula IIA, R3 is an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl group.
- The invention provides compounds of formula IIB:
- where L, R5, and R10 are as defined above for formulas I and IA;
R6, R7 and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen or methyl;
R1 and R2 are selected from alkyl groups having 3-6 carbon atoms;
R4 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms, where substitution if present is substitution with one or more halogens, —OH, or —COOH; and
R8 is an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heterocyclic group or an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms substituted with an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocyclic group, where substitution, if present, is substitution with one or more halogens, or —OH groups. - In specific embodiments of formula IIA or IIB, R5 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms. In specific embodiments, R12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH2—CO—NH2 group. In specific embodiments, R14 is a methyl group. R12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH2—CO—NH2 group and R14 is methyl. In specific embodiments, R5 is the dipeptidyl moiety A-A-, I-A-, A-N—, or I—NMeN.
- In specific embodiments of formula IIB, L is —CH2—X—CO— where X is S, N or O.
- In specific embodiments of formula IIB, L is —CH2—S—CO—.
- In specific embodiment of formula IIB, R8 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms substituted with an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocyclic group.
- In a specific embodiment of formula IIB, R5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms, R9 and R4 are independently hydrogen or methyl, and R3 is an optionally substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heteroaryl and more specifically R3 is benzyl, 4-OH-benzyl, or indolyl.
- The invention provides compounds of formula III:
- wherein R5, R10, L and Z are as defined as above; and
R1, R2, R6 or R7 selected from hydrogen or an alkyl group having 3-6 carbon atoms, wherein one or both of R7 and R6 are an alkyl group having 3-6 carbon atoms and if R6 is an alkyl group, then R1 is hydrogen and if R7 is an alkyl group then R2 is hydrogen. - In specific embodiments of formula III, L is —CH2—S—CO—.
- In specific embodiments of formula III, R6 or R7 is a 2-methyl propyl group.
- In specific embodiments of formula III, Z is:
-
- (i) a —NR9—(CH2)n—CO— linker, where n is 1 to 7;
- (ii) a —NR9—(CH2)n—CO—NR8—CH(R3)—CO— linker; or
- (ii) a —NR9—CH(R4)—CO—NR8—CH(R3)—CO— linker,
wherein R3 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group;
R4 is hydrogen, or an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms; and
R9 and R8 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl (or heterocyclic?) group; wherein when R3 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R8 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and when R4 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R9 is a hydrogen or a methyl group.
In specific embodiments of formula III, Z is —NR9—CH(R4)—CO—NR8—CH(R3)—CO—; where
R8 and R9 are hydrogen or methyl groups; and
- R3 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms optionally substituted with an optionally substituted aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl group; an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl group or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group.
- In specific embodiments of formula III, one or both of R1 or R2 is a 2-methylpropyl group; and R3 is a methyl or ethyl group substituted with a phenyl, 5-OH-phenyl, a 1H-indo-3-yl or a 5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl group.
- In specific embodiments of formula III, L is —CH2—S—CO—; R3 is a benzyl or a 4-OH benzyl group; and R4 is a methyl or a —CH2—COOH group.
- In specific embodiments of formula III, R5 is an alkyl having 1-3 carbon atoms. In specific embodiments, R12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH2—CO—NH2 group. In specific embodiments, R14 is a methyl group. R12 is hydrogen, a methyl group or a —CH2—CO—NH2 group and R14 is methyl. In specific embodiments, R5 is the dipeptidyl moiety A-A-, I-A-, A-N—, or I—NMeN.
- The invention provides compounds of formula IV and IVA:
- where variables are as defined for formula I above and n is 1 to 7. In specific embodiments L is L is —CH2—X—CO—, where X is S, O or NH. In more specific embodiments, L is —CH2—S—CO—, or —CH2—CH2—S—CO—. In specific embodiments, R5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- In specific embodiments of formula IV and IVA, n is 3, R6-R8 are hydrogen or methyl, R2 is an alkyl having 1-6 or 4-6 carbon atoms, and R1 is an alkyl group, particularly a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group. In more specific embodiments, R1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl group.
- In more specific embodiments, R1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted phenyl group. In more specific embodiments, R1 is a benzyl group. In specific embodiments R5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- In specific embodiments of formula IV and IVA, n is 2, R6-R8 are hydrogen or methyl, R2 is an alkyl having 1-6 or 4-6 carbon atoms, and R1 is an alkyl group, particularly a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group. In more specific embodiments, R1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl group.
- In more specific embodiments, R1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted phenyl group. In more specific embodiments, R1 is a benzyl group. In specific embodiments R5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- In specific embodiments of formula IV and IVA, n is 5-7, R6-R8 are hydrogen or methyl, R2 is an alkyl having 1-6 or 4-6 carbon atoms, and R1 is an alkyl group, particularly a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group. In more specific embodiments, R1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted aryl group.
- In more specific embodiments, R1 is a methyl group substituted with an optionally substituted phenyl group. In more specific embodiments, R1 is a benzyl group. In specific embodiments R5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- In specific embodiments of any formulas herein, R5 is an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms which is substituted with an optionally substituted carbocyclic or heterocyclic group. In a specific embodiment, the carbocyclic or heterocyclic group has a 5- or 6-member ring which is saturated or unsaturated and in which one or two ring carbons are —CO— moieties. In a specific embodiment, R5 is:
- where X is carbon or nitrogen and if X is carbon an additional hydrogen is present to satisfy valence; and R20 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms where optionally substitution is substitution with one or more hydroxyl, halogen, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino or dialkylamino groups.
- In specific embodiments of any formula herein, R5 is the dipeptidyl moiety A-A-, I-A-, A-N—, or I—NMeN.
- In specific embodiments of any formula herein, R9 is hydrogen or methyl and R4 is hydrogen, methyl, or —CH2—COOH. In specific embodiments of any formula herein, R9 is hydrogen, methyl or —CH2—COOH and R4 is hydrogen or methyl. In specific embodiments of any formula herein, R8 is hydrogen or methyl and R3 is hydrogen, an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl. In specific embodiments of any formula herein, R8 is an unsubstituted alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms, a benzyl, a 4-OH benzyl, a (1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, or a (5-OH-1H-indo-3-yl)methyl, and R3 is hydrogen or methyl. In specific embodiments of any formula herein, R1 and R2 are independently alkyl groups having 2-6 carbon atoms and R6 and R7 are hydrogens.
- The terms alkyl or alkyl group refer to a monoradical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon. Alkyl groups include straight-chain and branched alkyl groups. Unless otherwise indicated alkyl groups have 1-8 carbon atoms (C1-C8 alkyl groups) and preferred are those that contain 1-6 carbon atoms (C1-C6 alkyl groups) and more preferred are those that contain 1-3 carbon atoms (C1-C3 alkyl groups). Alkyl groups are optionally substituted with one or more non-hydrogen substituents as described herein. Exemplary alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, cyclopropyl, n-butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, branched-pentyl, n-hexyl, branched hexyl, all of which are optionally substituted. Substituted alkyl groups include fully halogenated or semihalogenated alkyl groups, such as alkyl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms, bromine atoms and/or iodine atoms. Substituted alkyl groups include fully fluorinated or semifluorinated alkyl.
- Cycloalkyl groups herein preferably have 1 ring having 5-8 carbon atoms and preferably have 5 or 6 carbon atoms. Cycloalkylene refers to divalent moieties derived formally from cycloalkyl groups as described above by removal of an additional hydrogen e.g., —(C6H12)—, a cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkylene, particularly cyclohexylene groups are often employed in linkers.
- An carbocyclic group is a group having one or more saturated or unsaturated carbon rings. Carbocyclic groups, for example, contain one or two double bonds. One or more carbons in an carbocyclic ring can be —CO— groups. carbocyclic c groups include those having 3-12 carbon atoms, and optionally replacing 1 or 2 carbon atoms with a —CO— group and optionally having 1, 2 or 3 double bonds. Carbocyclic groups include those having 5-6 ring carbons. Carbocyclic groups can contain one or more rings each of which is saturated or unsaturated. Carbocyclic groups include bicyclic and tricyclic groups. Preferred carbocyclic groups have a single 5- or 6-member ring. Carbocyclic groups are optionally substituted as described herein. Specifically, carbocyclic groups can be substituted with one or more alkyl groups. Carbocyclic groups include among others cycloalkyl and cycloalkenyl groups.
- A heterocyclic group is a group having one or more saturated or unsaturated carbon rings and which contains one to three heteroatoms (e.g., N, O or S) per ring. These groups optionally contain one, two or three double bonds. To satisfy valence requirement, a ring atom may be substituted as described herein. One or more carbons in the heterocyclic ring can be —CO— groups. Heterocyclic groups include those having 3-12 carbon atoms, and 1-6, heteroatoms, wherein 1 or 2 carbon atoms are replaced with a —CO— group. Heterocyclic groups include those having 3-12 or 3-10 ring atoms of which up to three can be heteroatoms other than carbon. Heterocyclic groups can contain one or more rings each of which is saturated or unsaturated. Heterocyclic groups include bicyclic and tricyclic groups. Preferred Heterocyclic groups have 5- or 6-member rings. Heterocyclic groups are optionally substituted as described herein. Specifically, heterocyclic groups can be substituted with one or more alkyl groups. Heterocyclic groups include those having 5- and 6-member rings with one or two nitrogens and one or two double bonds. Heterocyclic groups include those having 5- and 6-member rings with an oxygen or a sulfur and one or two double bonds. Heterocyclic group include those having 5- or 6-member rings and two different heteroatom, e.g., N and O, O and S or N and S. Specific heterocyclic groups include among others among others, pyrrolidinyl, piperidyl, piperazinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrrolinyl, furyl, thienyl, morpholinyl, oxazolyl, oxazolinyl, oxazolidinyl, indolyl, triazolyl, and triazinyl groups.
- Heterocyclene refers to a divalent species formally derived from a heterocylic group as described above by removal of a hydrogen.
- Aryl groups include groups having one or more 5- or 6-member aromatic rings. Aryl groups can contain one, two or three, 6-member aromatic rings. Aryl groups can contain two or more fused aromatic rings. Aryl groups can contain two or three fused aromatic rings. Aryl groups are optionally substituted with one or more non-hydrogen substituents. Substituted aryl groups include among others those which are substituted with alkyl or alkenyl groups, which groups in turn can be optionally substituted. Specific aryl groups include phenyl groups, biphenyl groups, and naphthyl groups, all of which are optionally substituted as described herein. Substituted aryl groups include fully halogenated or semihalogenated aryl groups, such as aryl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms, bromine atoms and/or iodine atoms. Substituted aryl groups include fully fluorinated or semifluorinated aryl groups, such as aryl groups having one or more hydrogens replaced with one or more fluorine atoms.
- Heteroaryl groups include groups having one or more aromatic rings in which at least one ring contains a heteroatom (a non-carbon ring atom). Heteroaryl groups include those having one or two heteroaromatic rings carrying 1, 2 or 3 heteroatoms and optionally have one 6-member aromatic ring. Heteroaryl groups can contain 5-20, 5-12 or 5-10 ring atoms. Heteroaryl groups include those having one aromatic ring contains a heteroatom and one aromatic ring containing carbon ring atoms. Heteroaryl groups include those having one or more 5- or 6-member aromatic heteroaromatic rings and one or more 6-member carbon aromatic rings. Heteroaromatic rings can include one or more N, O, or S atoms in the ring. Heteroaromatic rings can include those with one, two or three N, those with one or two O, and those with one or two S, or combinations of one or two or three N, O or S. Specific heteroaryl groups include furyl, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, quinolinyl, and purinyl groups. In specific embodiments herein aryl groups contain no heteroatoms in the aryl rings. Aryl including heteroaryl groups are optionally substituted.
- Heteroatoms include O, N, S, P or B. More specifically heteroatoms are N, O or S. In specific embodiments, one or more heteroatoms are substituted for carbons in aromatic or carbocyclic rings. To satisfy valence any heteroatoms in such aromatic or carbocyclic rings may be bonded to H or a substituent group, e.g., an alkyl group or other substituent.
- Arylalkyl groups are alkyl groups substituted with one or more aryl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted. Exemplary arylalkyl groups are benzyl groups.
- Heteroarylalkyl groups are alkyl groups substituted with one or more heteroaryl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted.
- Alkylaryl groups are aryl groups substituted with one or more alkyl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted. Specific alkylaryl groups are alkyl-substituted phenyl groups such as methylphenyl.
- Alkylheteroaryl groups are heteroaryl groups substituted with one or more alkyl groups wherein the alkyl groups optionally carry additional substituents and the aryl groups are optionally substituted.
- An alkoxy group is an alkyl group, as broadly discussed above, linked to oxygen (Ralkyl—O—). An aryloxy group is an aryl group, as discussed above, linked to an oxygen (Raryl—O—). A heteroaryloxy group is a heteroaryl group as discussed above linked to an oxygen (Rheteroaryl—O—).
- An acyl group is an R′—CO group where R′ in general is a hydrogen, an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl group as described above. In specific embodiments, acyl groups have 1-20, 1-12 or 1-6 carbon atoms and optionally 1-3 heteroatom, optionally one double bond or one triple bond. In specific embodiments, R is a C1-C6 alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group. cyclic configuration or a combination thereof, attached to the parent structure through a carbonyl functionality. Examples include acetyl, benzoyl, propionyl, isobutyryl, or oxalyl. The R′ group of acyl groups are optionally substituted as described herein. When R′ is hydrogen, the group is a formyl group. An acetyl group is a CH3—CO— group. Another exemplary acyl group is a benzyloxy group.
- An alkylthio group is an alkyl group, as broadly discussed above, linked to a sulfur (Ralkyl—S—) An arylthio group is an aryl group, as discussed above, linked to a sulfur (Raryl—S—).
- The term amino group is refer to the species —N(H)2—. The term alkylamino refers to the species —NHR″ where R″ is an alkyl group, particularly an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms. The term dialkylamino refers to the species —NR″2 where each R″ is independently an alkyl group, particularly an alkyl group having 1-3 carbon atoms.
- Groups herein are optionally substituted most generally alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and aryl, heteroaryl groups can be substituted with one or more halogen, hydroxyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, oxo group, thioxo group, azide group, cyanate group, isocyanate group, acyl group, haloalkyl group, alkyl group, alkenyl group or alkynyl group (particularly those having 1-4 carbons), a phenyl or benzyl group (including those that are halogen or alkyl substituted), alkoxy, alkylthio, or mercapto (HS—). In specific embodiments, optional substitution is substitution with 1-12 non-hydrogen substituents. In specific embodiments, optional substitution is substitution with 1-6 non-hydrogen substituents. In specific embodiments, optional substitution is substitution with 1-3 non-hydrogen substituents. In specific embodiments, optional substituents contain 6 or fewer carbon atoms. In specific embodiments, optional substitution is substitution by one or more halogen, hydroxy group, cyano group, oxo group, thioxo group, unsubstituted C1-C6 alkyl group or unsubstituted aryl group. The term oxo group and thioxo group refer to substitution of a carbon atom with a ═O or a ═S to form respectively —CO— (carbonyl) or —CS— (thiocarbonyl) groups.
- Specific substituted alkyl groups include haloalkyl groups, particularly trihalomethyl groups and specifically trifluoromethyl groups. Specific substituted aryl groups include mono-, di-, tri, tetra- and pentahalo-substituted phenyl groups; mono-, di, tri-, tetra-, penta-, hexa-, and hepta-halo-substituted naphthalene groups; 3- or 4-halo-substituted phenyl groups, 3- or 4-alkyl-substituted phenyl groups, 3- or 4-alkoxy-substituted phenyl groups, 3- or 4-RCO-substituted phenyl, 5- or 6-halo-substituted naphthalene groups. More specifically, substituted aryl groups include acetylphenyl groups, particularly 4-acetylphenyl groups; fluorophenyl groups, particularly 3-fluorophenyl and 4-fluorophenyl groups; chlorophenyl groups, particularly 3-chlorophenyl and 4-chlorophenyl groups; methylphenyl groups, particularly 4-methylphenyl groups, and methoxyphenyl groups, particularly 4-methoxyphenyl groups.
- As to any of the above groups which contain one or more substituents, it is understood, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non-feasible. In addition, the compounds of this invention include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds.
- Compounds of the invention, particularly compounds of formulas I, IA, IIA, IIB, III, IV and IVA can be prepared by one of ordinary skill in the art in view of the descriptions provided herein and what is known in the art from commercially or otherwise readily available starting materials and reagents. As described herein in the Examples, standard solid-phase methods of peptide synthesis can be readily adapted for synthesis of the compounds of the formulas herein. Methods for insertion of peptoids, and N-methylated amino acids into such compounds are known in the art and can, as described herein, be readily adapted to such preparation. Among others references [67], [70], and [75]-[80] provide methods useful in synthesis of the compounds herein. Each of these references is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for description of such methods.
- Well-known methods for assessment of drugability can be used to further assess active compounds of the invention for application to given therapeutic application. The term “drugability” relates to pharmaceutical properties of a prospective drug for administration, distribution, metabolism and excretion. Drugability is assessed in various ways in the art. For example, the “Lipinski Rule of 5” for determining drug-like characteristics in a molecule related to in vivo absorption and permeability can be applied (C. A. Lipinski, F. Lombardo, B. W. Dominy, P. J. Feeney, Experimental and computational approaches to estimate solubility and permeability in drug discovery and development settings, Adv. Drug Del. Rev., 2001, 46, 3-26 and Arup K. Ghose, Vellarkad N. Viswanadhan, and John J. Wendoloski, A Knowledge-Based Approach in Designing Combinatorial or Medicinal Chemistry Libraries for Drug Discovery, J. Combin. Chem., 1999, 1, 55-68.) In general a preferred drug for oral administration exhibits no more than one violation of the following rules:
- (1) Not more than 5 hydrogen bond donors (e.g., nitrogen or oxygen atoms with one or more hydrogens);
(2) Not more than 10 hydrogen bond acceptors (e.g., nitrogen or oxygen atoms);
(3) Molecular weight under 500 g/mol and more preferably between 160 and 480; and
(4) log P less than 5 and more preferably between −0.4 to +5.6 and yet more preferably −1<log P<2. - Compounds of this invention preferred for therapeutic application include those that do not violate one or more of 1-4 above.
- Compounds of this invention preferred for therapeutic application include those having log P less than 5 and more preferably between −0.4 to +5.6 and yet more preferably −1<log P.
- Compounds of the invention may contain chemical groups (acidic or basic groups) that can be in the form of salts. Exemplary acid addition salts include acetates (such as those formed with acetic acid or trihaloacetic acid, for example, trifluoroacetic acid), adipates, alginates, ascorbates, aspartates, benzoates, benzenesulfonates, bisulfates, borates, butyrates, citrates, camphorates, camphorsulfonates, cyclopentanepropionates, digluconates, dodecylsulfates, ethanesulfonates, fumarates, glucoheptanoates, glycerophosphates, hemisulfates, heptanoates, hexanoates, hydrochlorides (formed with hydrochloric acid), hydrobromides (formed with hydrogen bromide), hydroiodides, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonates, lactates, maleates (formed with maleic acid), methanesulfonates (formed with methanesulfonic acid), 2-naphthalenesulfonates, nicotinates, nitrates, oxalates, pectinates, persulfates, 3-phenylpropionates, phosphates, picrates, pivalates, propionates, salicylates, succinates, sulfates (such as those formed with sulfuric acid), sulfonates (such as those mentioned herein), tartrates, thiocyanates, toluenesulfonates such as tosylates, undecanoates, and the like.
- Exemplary basic salts include ammonium salts, alkali metal salts such as sodium, lithium, and potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and magnesium salts, salts with organic bases (for example, organic amines) such as benzathines, dicyclohexylamines, hydrabamines [formed with N,N-bis(dehydro-abietyl)ethylenediamine], N-methyl-D-glucamines, N-methyl-D-glucamides, t-butyl amines, and salts with amino acids such as arginine, lysine and the like. Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quaternized with agents such as lower alkyl halides (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (e.g., dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl, and diamyl sulfates), long chain halides (e.g., decyl, lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), aralkyl halides (e.g., benzyl and phenethyl bromides), and others. Salt of the invention include “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” which refers to those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free bases or free acids, and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts comprise pharmaceutically-acceptable anions and/or cations.
- Compounds of the present invention, and salts thereof, may exist in their tautomeric form, in which hydrogen atoms are transposed to other parts of the molecules and the chemical bonds between the atoms of the molecules are consequently rearranged. It should be understood that all tautomeric forms, insofar as they may exist, are included within the invention. Additionally, inventive compounds may have trans and cis isomers and may contain one or more chiral centers, therefore exist in enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms. The invention includes all such isomers, as well as mixtures of cis and trans isomers, mixtures of diastereomers and racemic mixtures of enantiomers (optical isomers). When no specific mention is made of the configuration (cis, trans or R or S) of a compound (or of an asymmetric carbon), then any one of the isomers or a mixture of more than one isomer is intended. The processes for preparation can use racemates, enantiomers, or diastereomers as starting materials. When enantiomeric or diastereomeric products are prepared, they can be separated by conventional methods, for example, by chromatographic or fractional crystallization. The inventive compounds may be in the free or hydrate form.
- With respect to the various compounds of the invention, the atoms therein may have various isotopic forms, e.g., isotopes of hydrogen include deuterium and tritium. All isotopic variants of compounds of the invention are included within the invention and particularly included at deuterium and 13C isotopic variants. It will be appreciated that such isotopic variants may be useful for carrying out various chemical and biological analyses, investigations of reaction mechanisms and the like. Methods for making isotopic variants are known in the art.
- The invention expressly includes pharmaceutically usable solvates of compounds according to formulas herein. The compounds of formula I can be solvated, e.g. hydrated. The solvation can occur in the course of the manufacturing process or can take place, e.g. as a consequence of hygroscopic properties of an initially anhydrous compound of formulas herein (hydration).
- Compounds of the invention can have prodrug forms. Prodrugs of the compounds of the invention are useful in the methods of this invention. Any compound that will be converted in vivo to provide a biologically, pharmaceutically or therapeutically active form of a compound of the invention is a prodrug. Various examples and forms of prodrugs are well known in the art. Examples of prodrugs are found, inter alia, in Design of Prodrugs, edited by H. Bundgaard, (Elsevier, 1985), Methods in Enzymology, Vol. 42, at pp. 309-396, edited by K. Widder, et. al. (Academic Press, 1985); A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, edited by Krosgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Chapter 5, “Design and Application of Prodrugs,” by H. Bundgaard, at pp. 113-191, 1991); H. Bundgaard, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, Vol. 8, p. 1-38 (1992); H. Bundgaard, et al., Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences, Vol. 77, p. 285 (1988); and Nogrady (1985) Medicinal Chemistry A Biochemical Approach, Oxford University Press, New York, pages 388-392).
- Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are those carriers that are compatible with the other ingredients in the formulation and are biologically acceptable. Carriers can be solid or liquid. Solid carriers can include one or more substances that can also act as flavoring agents, lubricants, solubilizers, suspending agents, fillers, glidants, compression aids, binders, tablet-disintegrating agents, or encapsulating materials. Liquid carriers can be used in preparing solutions, suspensions, emulsions, syrups and elixirs. The active ingredient can be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier such as water (of appropriate purity, e.g., pyrogen-free, sterile, etc.), an organic solvent, a mixture of both, or a pharmaceutically acceptable oil or fat. The liquid carrier can contain other suitable pharmaceutical additives such as, for example, solubilizers, emulsifiers, buffers, preservatives, sweeteners, flavoring agents, suspending agents, thickening agents, colors, viscosity regulators, stabilizers or osmo-regulators. Compositions for oral administration can be in either liquid or solid form.
- Suitable solid carriers include, for example, calcium phosphate, magnesium stearate, talc, sugars, lactose, dextrin, starch, gelatin, cellulose, methyl cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidine, low melting waxes and ion exchange resins. Suitable examples of liquid carriers for oral and parenteral administration include water of appropriate purity, aqueous solutions (particularly containing additives, e.g. cellulose derivatives, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose solution), alcohols (including monohydric alcohols and polyhydric alcohols e.g. glycols) and their derivatives, and oils. For parenteral administration, the carrier can also be an oily ester such as ethyl oleate and isopropyl myristate. Sterile liquid carriers are used in sterile liquid form compositions for parenteral administration. The liquid carrier for pressurized compositions can be halogenated hydrocarbon or other pharmaceutically acceptable propellant. Liquid pharmaceutical compositions that are sterile solutions or suspensions can be administered by, for example, intramuscular, intraperitoneal or subcutaneous injection. Sterile solutions can also be administered intravenously. Compositions for oral administration can be in either liquid or solid form. The carrier can also be in the form of creams and ointments, pastes, and gels. The creams and ointments can be viscous liquid or semisolid emulsions of either the oil-in-water or water-in-oil type. Pastes comprised of absorptive powders dispersed in petroleum or hydrophilic petroleum containing the active ingredient can also be suitable.
- Staphylococcal infections, particularly S. aureus infections, can affect various parts of the body and can include skin infection and more serious conditions such as osteomyelitis, endocarditis, septic arthritis, and toxic shock syndrome. S. aureus strains are considered the leading cause of nosocomial infections in the United States. Staphylococcal infections, particularly S. aureus infections, caused by a strain that is resistant to commonly used antibiotics are particularly serious and life-threatening. Of particular concern are strains that exhibit increased resistance to vancomycin.
- Compounds of the invention are useful in the treatment of such infections.
- Administration of one or more compounds of the invention can be combined with antibiotic regimens used for the treatment of staphylococcal infections. Various known antibiotics and various known antibiotic regimens can be employed in combination with one or more of the compounds of this invention. One of ordinary skill in the art can select form a variety of known antibiotics, which may be used alone or in combination, and which can specifically include, vancomycin, linezolid, and oxacillin. For example, one or more compounds of the invention can be used in combination with intravenous or oral antibiotics.
- In another embodiment, the invention provides a medicament for treatment of an infectious disease, particularly a staphylococcal infection. The medicament comprises a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of this invention as illustrated in one or more formulas herein which compounds exhibit antivirulence and/or antibacterial activity. In a specific embodiment, the medicament of this invention can also comprise a therapeutically effective amount of one or more antibiotics. The invention also provides a method for making this medicament which comprises combining a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of this invention having anti-virulence activity with a selected pharmaceutical carrier appropriate for a given method of administration. In a specific embodiment, the method for making a medicament can additional include combining a therapeutically effective amount of one or more antibiotics in the medicament. The medicament may be an oral dosage form, an intravenous dosage form or any other art-recognized dosage form.
- The present invention also provides methods of increasing or reducing the virulence of Staphylococcus species and specifically Staphylococcus aureus. In one aspect, the method comprises contacting a bacterium with an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. In another aspect, the method comprises contacting a bacterium with a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compounds of the present invention. In yet another aspect, the method comprises contacting a bacterium with a precursor which can form an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
- Methods of this invention comprise the step of administering a “therapeutically effective amount” of the present therapeutic formulations containing the present compounds, to treat, reduce or regulate a disease state in a patient, including a disease state involving one or more infectious agents such as bacteria. The term “therapeutically effective amount,” as used herein, refers to the amount of the therapeutic formulation, that, when administered to the individual is effective to treat, reduce or regulate a disease state in a patient, including a disease state involving one or more infectious agents such as bacteria and more specifically Staphylococcus. As is understood in the art, the therapeutically effective amount of a given compound or formulation will depend at least in part upon, the mode of administration (e.g. intravenous, oral, topical administration), any carrier or vehicle employed, and the specific individual to whom the formulation is to be administered (age, weight, condition, sex, etc.). The dosage requirements need to achieve the “therapeutically effective amount” vary with the particular formulations employed, the route of administration, and clinical objectives. Based on the results obtained in standard pharmacological test procedures, projected daily dosages of active compound can be determined as is understood in the art.
- Compounds of the invention are useful in therapeutic methods, particularly for treating infections. Any suitable form of administration can be employed in the method herein. The compounds of this invention can, for example, be administered in oral dosage forms including tablets, capsules, pills, powders, granules, elixirs, tinctures, suspensions, syrups and emulsions. Oral dosage forms may include sustained release or timed release formulations. The compounds of this invention may also be administered topically, intravenously, intraperitoneally, subcutaneously, or intramuscularly, all using dosage forms well known to those of ordinary skill in the pharmaceutical arts.
- Compounds of this invention can also be administered in intranasal form by topical use of suitable intranasal vehicles. For intranasal or intrabronchial inhalation or insulation, the compounds of this invention may be formulated into an aqueous or partially aqueous solution, which can then be utilized in the form of an aerosol. Administration includes any form of administration that is known in the art and is intended to encompass administration in any appropriate dosage form and further is intended to encompass administration of a compound, alone or in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Pharmaceutical carriers are selected as is known in the art based on the chosen route of administration and standard pharmaceutical practice.
- The compounds of this invention can also be administered to the eye, preferably as a topical opthalmic formulation. The compounds of this invention can also be combined with a preservative and an appropriate vehicle such as mineral oil or liquid lanolin to provide an opthalmic ointment. The compounds of this invention may be administered rectally or vaginally in the form of a conventional suppository. The compounds of this invention may also be administered transdermally through the use of a transdermal patch containing the active compound and a carrier that is inert to the active compound, is non-toxic to the skin, and allows delivery of the agent for systemic absorption into the blood stream via the skin.
- The compounds of the invention may be administered employing an occlusive device. A variety of occlusive devices can be used to release an ingredient into the blood stream such as a semipermeable membrane covering a reservoir containing the active ingredient with or without a carrier, or a matrix containing the active ingredient. Other occlusive devices are known in the literature.
- Pharmaceutical compositions and medicaments of this invention comprise one or more compounds in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient, or diluent. Such compositions and medicaments are prepared in accordance with acceptable pharmaceutical procedures, such as, for example, those described in Remingtons Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th edition, ed. Alfonoso R. Gennaro, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa. (1985), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The invention also encompasses method for making a medicament employing one or more compounds of this invention which exhibit a therapeutic effect.
- In another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutical and therapeutic preparations comprising a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of the present invention of Formula I optionally in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In particular, pharmaceutical and therapeutic preparations of this invention comprise an amount or combined amount of one or more compounds of this invention effective for bacterial interference, particularly of a Staphylococcus species and more particularly of Staphylococcus aureus and including a Staphylococcus aureus group III strain and more particularly a bacterial human or veterinary pathogen. Compounds useful in the methods of this invention include pharmaceutically-acceptable salts of the compounds of formulas herein. Compounds useful in the methods of this invention include pharmaceutically-acceptable prodrugs of the compounds of formulas herein. Salts include any salts derived from the acids of the formulas herein which are acceptable for use in human or veterinary applications. Bacterial interference includes attenuation of virulence.
- In another aspect, the present invention provides a method of treating an infectious disease comprising administering to an individual in need of treatment, a composition comprising one or more compounds of the present invention. In an embodiment, the infectious disease relates to that associated with an infectious agent comprising a bacterium. In a specific embodiment, the bacteria are Staphylococcus. In a specific embodiment, the bacteria are one or more selected from the group consisting of S. aureus, S. epidermidis. In a specific embodiment, the bacteria are one or more drug resistant Staphylococcus. Compounds of the invention can be employed in human treatment or in veterinary treatment.
- All references throughout this application, for example patent documents including issued or granted patents or equivalents; patent application publications; and non-patent literature documents or other source material; are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entireties, as though individually incorporated by reference.
- All patents and publications mentioned in the specification are indicative of the levels of skill of those skilled in the art to which the invention pertains. References cited herein are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety to indicate the state of the art, in some cases as of their filing date, and it is intended that this information can be employed herein, if needed, to exclude (for example, to disclaim) specific embodiments that are in the prior art. For example, when a compound is claimed, it should be understood that compounds known in the prior art, including certain compounds disclosed in the references disclosed herein (particularly in referenced patent documents), are not intended to be included in the claim.
- When a group of substituents is disclosed herein, it is understood that all individual members of those groups and all subgroups, including any isomers and enantiomers of the group members, and classes of compounds that can be formed using the substituents are disclosed separately. When a compound is claimed, it should be understood that compounds known in the art including the compounds disclosed in the references disclosed herein are not intended to be included. When a Markush group or other grouping is used herein, all individual members of the group and all combinations and subcombinations possible of the group are intended to be individually included in the disclosure.
- Every formulation or combination of components described or exemplified can be used to practice the invention, unless otherwise stated. Specific names of compounds are intended to be exemplary, as it is known that one of ordinary skill in the art can name the same compounds differently. When a compound is described herein such that a particular isomer or enantiomer of the compound is not specified, for example, in a formula or in a chemical name, that description is intended to include each isomers and enantiomer of the compound described individual or in any combination.
- One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that methods, device elements, starting materials, and synthetic methods other than those specifically exemplified can be employed in the practice of the invention without resort to undue experimentation. All art-known functional equivalents, of any such methods, device elements, starting materials, and synthetic methods are intended to be included in this invention. Whenever a range is given in the specification, for example, a temperature range, a time range, or a composition range, all intermediate ranges and subranges, as well as all individual values included in the ranges given are intended to be included in the disclosure.
- As used herein, “comprising” is synonymous with “including,” “containing,” or “characterized by,” and is inclusive or open-ended and does not exclude additional, unrecited elements or method steps. As used herein, “consisting of” excludes any element, step, or ingredient not specified in the claim element. As used herein, “consisting essentially of” does not exclude materials or steps that do not materially affect the basic and novel characteristics of the claim. Any recitation herein of the term “comprising”, particularly in a description of components of a composition or in a description of elements of a device, is understood to encompass those compositions and methods consisting essentially of and consisting of the recited components or elements. The invention illustratively described herein suitably may be practiced in the absence of any element or elements, limitation or limitations which is not specifically disclosed herein.
- Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, there can be discussion herein of beliefs or understandings of underlying principles relating to the invention. It is recognized that regardless of the ultimate correctness of any mechanistic explanation or hypothesis, an embodiment of the invention can nonetheless be operative and useful.
- The terms and expressions which have been employed are used as terms of description and not of limitation, and there is no intention in the use of such terms and expressions of excluding any equivalents of the features shown and described or portions thereof, but it is recognized that various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention claimed. Thus, it should be understood that although the present invention has been specifically disclosed by preferred embodiments and optional features, modification and variation of the concepts herein disclosed may be resorted to by those skilled in the art, and that such modifications and variations are considered to be within the scope of this invention.
- Linear peptides were synthesized on Boc-protected, amino acid pre-loaded 4-hydroxymethyl-phenylacetamidomethyl (PAM) resin (0.6-0.8 mmol/g) using standard solid-phase synthesis protocols.
- All chemical reagents were purchased from commercial sources (Alfa-Aesar, Sigma-Aldrich, and Acros) and used without further purification. Solvents were purchased from commercial sources (Sigma-Aldrich and J. T. Baker) and used as obtained, with the exception of anhydrous dichloromethane (CH2Cl2), which was stored over molecular sieves. Water (18 MΩ) was purified using a Millipore Analyzer Feed System. Solid-phase resin was purchased from Chem-Impex International. Cyclic dipeptides (cyclo-(Tyr-Pro) and cyclo-(Phe-Pro)) controls were synthesized according to a previously reported method.[57]
- Reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (RP-HPLC) was performed using a Shimadzu system equipped with an SCL-10Avp controller, an LC-10AT pump, an FCV-10ALvp solvent mixer, and an SPD-10MAvp UV/vis diode array detector. An analytical Phenomenex Gemini C18 column (5 μm, 4.6 mm×250 mm, 110 Å) was used for analytical RP-HPLC work. A semi-preparative Phenomenex Gemini C18 column (5 μm, 10 mm×250 mm, 110 Å) was used for preparative RP-HPLC work. Standard RP-HPLC conditions were as follows: flow rates=1 mL min−1 for analytical separations and 5 mL min−1 for semi-preparative separations; mobile phase A=18 MO water+0.1% trifluoroacetic acid (TFA); mobile phase B=acetonitrile (ACN)+0.1% TFA. Purities were determined by integration of peaks with UV detection at 220 nm. Peptide thioesters were purified using a linear gradient (75%→45% A over 30 min). Cyclic peptides were purified using a linear gradient (70%→55% A over 27 min). Overall sample purity was determined using a linear gradient (90%→5% A over 27 min).
- MALDITOF mass spectrometry (MS) data were obtained on a Bruker RELEX II spectrometer equipped with a 337 nm laser and a reflectron. In positive ion mode, the acceleration voltage was 25 kV. Exact Mass (EM) data were obtained on a Waters (Micromass) LCT ESI-TOF spectrometer. The samples were sprayed with a sample cone voltage of 20 V.
- Two solid-phase synthesis approaches have been implemented in the past to construct native AIPs and their analogs. The first approach utilizes chemoselective cleavage of the linear, protected peptide from the solid support with concomitant unmasking of the cysteine sulfhydryl group. The protected peptide can then be macrocyclized via a carbodiimide coupling and subsequently deprotected. [24, 50, 61] This approach, however, is limited in part by the (i) poor solubilities of the protected peptides and (ii) low macrocyclization efficiencies due to the steric bulk of the protecting groups. The second synthetic approach addresses these challenges by incorporating an initial global deprotection step prior to a solution phase, chemoselective thiol-thioester exchange to form the macrocyclic products.[45, 49] This latter approach is generally more efficient and has the potential for even further improvement. This general strategy was used to synthesize compounds of Table 1 herein. First, standard Fmoc/tBu solid-phase peptide synthesis methods to generate the linear peptides on 4-hydroxymethyl-phenylacetamidomethyl (PAM) polystyrene resin (Scheme 1). Cleavage and global deprotection according to the method of Hilvert et al. gave the linear peptide thioesters,[51, 62, 63] which were then purified to homogeneity by semi-preparative RP-HPLC and isolated in acceptable yields (25-50%).
- Intramolecular thiol-thioester exchange reactions in a range of buffers was assessed to Studies were then undertaken to develop macrocyclization conditions. It was found that found that performing the macrocyclization reaction in 6 M guanidinium chloride in 0.1 M phosphate buffer:ACN (3:2, vol:vol) at a pH=6.8 gave quantitative macrocyclization within 24 h at room temperature. Elevating the temperature to 50° C. reduced reaction times to less than 2 h. These conditions were used to effect macrocyclization of all the AIP analogs prepared in this study (Table 1). This synthesis protocol was also used to generate AIPs I-IV and the known global AgrC inhibitor, tAIP-I D2A, for use as controls. Overall, this synthetic route represents an improvement over previously reported methods.[45,49,51] Further, the thiol-thioester exchange reaction conditions described herein can also be used in other contexts, for example, in the total synthesis of proteins using native chemical ligation. [64] Dawson et al. (1994) [64] is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for a description of the synthesis of polypeptides by native chemical ligation.
- These synthetic methods were employed to prepare the compounds of Table 1. Initially a set of 13 compounds were prepared in which the amino acids of AIP-III were evaluated through systematic alanine and D-amino acid point mutations. This initial set of 13 peptides (Table 1) was designed to identify key residues and stereocenters for AIP-III:AgrC interactions. Six of the seven residues were modified in the alanine scan with Cys3 maintained for thiolactone formation. All seven residues were evaluated in the D-amino acid scan. A second set of compounds was synthesized to include two and three alanines, alternate aromatic residues in place of Phe5, and to truncate and elongate exocyclic tails.
-
TABLE 1 Structures of the peptides synthesized in this study.a 1st Generation analogues 2nd Generation analogues AIP-III D-I1 DI-N-(C-D-F-L-L) AIP-III I1A/N2A A-A-(C-D-F-L-L) AIP-III D-N2 I-DN-(C-D-F-L-L) AIP-III I1A/D4A A-N-(C-A-F-L-L) AIP-III D-C3 I-N-(DC-D-F-L-L) AIP-III N2A/D4A I-A-(C-A-F-L-L) AIP-III D-D4 I-N-(C-DD-F-L-L) AIP-III A-A-(C-A-F-L-L) AIP-III D-F5 I-N-(C-D-DF-L-L) I1A/N2A/D4A AIP-III D-L6 I-N-(C-D-F-DL-L) tAIP-III Ac-(C-D-F-L-L) AIP-III D-L7 I-N-(C-D-F-L-DL) tAIP-III D2A Ac-(C-A-F-L-L) AIP-III I1A A-N-(C-D-F-L-L) tAIP-III D2A/F3Y Ac-(C-A-Y-L-L) AIP-III N2A I-A-(C-D-F-L-L) tAIP-III D2A/F3W Ac-(C-A-W-L-L) AIP-III D4A I-N-(C-A-F-L-L) Ac-AIP-III Ac-I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) AIP-III F5A I-N-(C-D-A-L-L) G-AIP-III G-I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) AIP-III L6A I-N-(C-D-F-A-L) A-AIP-III A-I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) AIP-III L7A I-N-(C-D-F-L-A) Y-AIP-III Y-I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) aSee Supporting information for MS and HPLC characterization data. Shaded cells represent control peptides. - To deprotect the resin, a portion of resin (50 mg) was first swelled by suspension in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) for 30 min at rt and then drained. The resin was then treated with TFA (50% in CH2Cl2, 2 mL, 2×2 min, rt) and washed with dimethylformamide (DMF; 3×2 mL). To couple each amino acid, Fmoc-protected amino acids (2 equiv. relative to resin), 2-(1 Hbenzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HBTU; 2 equiv.), and diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA; 2 equiv.) were dissolved in DMF (2 mL). The solution was allowed to pre-activate for 1 min prior to being added to the resin and agitated for 1 h at rt. After each coupling step, the resin was drained and washed with DMF (2×2 mL). To remove the Fmoc-protecting group after each coupling, the resin was treated with piperidine (2 mL of 20% in DMF, 2×10 min) and washed with DMF (3×2 mL). To acetylate the amino terminus, acetic anhydride (10 equiv.) and DIPEA (7 equiv.) were dissolved in DMF (2 mL), and the solution was added to the resin and agitated for 15 min. The resin was then drained and washed with DMF (2×2 mL). Upon synthesis of a complete linear peptide sequence, the resin was washed with diethyl ether (1×2 mL) and dried under vacuum for 48 h.
- The linear peptidyl-resin (70-90 mg) was placed in a dry, three-neck round bottom flask and suspended in anhydrous CH2Cl2 under argon at rt for 15 min. Me2AlCl (20 equiv., 1 mL of 1 M hexane solution) and anhydrous CH2Cl2 (3 mL) were stirred in a separate, dry round bottom flask under argon for 5 min at 0° C. Ethanethiol (EtSH) (60 equiv.) was added drop-wise at 0° C., and the solution was stirred for 15 min at 0° C. This solution was then added to the suspended resin and stirred under argon for 5 h at rt to effect cleavage of the linear peptide as a thioester. The cleavage product solution was transferred into a new round bottom flask containing a TFA solution (95% (aq.), 3 mL) and the solvents were removed in vacuo to yield a yellow or orange oil. The resulting oil was subjected again to TFA solution (3 mL, 30 min) and filtered from the resin. The resin was washed with TFA solution (1×2 mL) to collect any additional peptide. A cooled solution of diethyl ether:hexane (1:1, 40 mL, 0° C.) was added to the filtrate, and the peptide was allowed to precipitate overnight in a freezer at −20° C. The precipitated peptide solution was centrifuged and the supernatant removed to yield a white solid. This solid was dissolved in acetonitrile (ACN) (50% (aq.)), lyophilized, redissolved in ACN (50% (aq.)) and purified by semi-preparative RP-HPLC. Collected HPLC fractions were lyophilized to yield the linear peptide thioester as a white powder (25-50% isolated yields).
- Purified peptide thioester was dissolved in a 60% guanidinium chloride (6 M solution in 0.1 M phosphate buffer):40% ACN solution to a final concentration ranging from 100 μM to 2 mM. The pH of the solution was then adjusted to 6.8. The peptide was gently agitated using a multi-purpose rotator at 50° C., and cyclization was monitored by analytical RP-HPLC. Upon completion, cyclic peptide was purified by semi-preparative RP-HPLC and lyophilized. The resulting white powder was then dissolved in 1 Mhydrochloric acid (400 μL) and lyophilized prior to bioanalysis.
- Two sets of peptidomimetics, resulting from an N-methyl scan and a peptoid scan of AIP-III, were prepared to assess backbone-amide hydrogen bond interactions and conformational restrictions of the AIP-III scaffold. These peptidomimetics are illustrated in
FIG. 4 . The method of Example 1 involving initial synthesis of linear peptidyl thioesters using Fmoc peptide assembly on PAM resin followed by chemoselective cyclization was not suitable for the synthesis of peptides containing N-alkylated amino acids at the C-terminus. It is well-known that a side reaction, diketopiperazine (DKP) formation, is observed for C-terminal proline-containing peptides and N-methylated peptides.[51, 76, 77] To circumvent this side reaction and minimize DKP formation, the linear peptidomimetic thioesters were synthesized in a Boc/Fmoc hybrid peptide assembly: the three C-terminal residues (Phe-Leu-Leu) were introduced using Boc chemistry and the four N-terminal residues (Ile-Asn-Cys-Asp) were introduced using Fmoc chemistry (Scheme 2). To introduce peptoid residues, a sub-monomer protocol was used, [75] while commercially-available N-methylated amino acids were introduced through standard protocols. Zuckermann et al. 1992 [75] is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for methods of synthesis of compounds of this invention. This hybrid synthetic route provided all of the compounds ofFIG. 4 in acceptable yields, with the exception of AIP-III nN2 that was found to further react in aqueous solutions. All products were purified to homogeneity by RP-HPLC and obtained in mg scale. - Peptidomimetic AIP-III derivatives that were not modified at the C-terminus residue (Leu7) were synthesized using Boc-protected, L-leucine pre-loaded PAM resin (0.8 mmol/g).
- To synthesize the AIP-III N-Me-L7 derivative, Fmoc-N-Me-Leu-OH was manually loaded on aminomethyl polystyrene (AM) resin: AM resin (100 mg, 1.17 mmol/g) was swelled in diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA; 10% in CH2Cl2; 2 mL) for 10 min. The resin was washed with DIPEA (10% in CH2Cl2; 3×1 mL) and dimethylformamide (DMF; 3×2 mL). 4-(bromomethyl) phenyl acetic acid (1.4 equiv.) and N,N′-diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC; 1.7 equiv.) were dissolved in CH2Cl2. The solution was added to the resin for overnight agitation at rt. The resin was washed with DMF (3×2 mL) and CH2Cl2 (3×2 mL), then suspended in DMF. Fmoc-N-Me-Leu-OH (2 equiv.) and DIPEA (4 equiv.) were dissolved in DMF and added to the resin for overnight agitation at rt. The resin was washed with DMF (2×2 mL) and CH2Cl2 (2×2 mL), then treated with a solution of acetic anhydride (10 equiv.) and DIPEA (7 equiv.) in DMF for 15 min. The resin was then washed with DMF (2×2 mL) and CH2Cl2 (2×2 mL), followed by chloranil test to determine the absence of free amines (see procedure below).
- To synthesize the AIP-III nL7 analog, bromoacetic acid was manually loaded on PAM resin: PAM resin (100 mg, 0.85 mmol/g) was swelled in minimal amount of DMF (1 mL) for 30 min. Bromoacetic acid (10 equiv.) was dissolved in dry CH2Cl2 at 0° C. DIC (5 equiv.) was added, the reaction was stirred at 0° C. for 20 min and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The resulting solid was dissolved in minimal amount of DMF (1 mL) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP; 0.1 equiv.) was added. The solution was added to the resin and agitated for 1 h at rt. The solvent was drained and the resin was washed with DMF (2×2 mL) and CH2Cl2 (2×2 mL).
- To swell the resins: the resin (50 mg) was first suspended in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) for 30 min at rt and then drained.
- To remove the Boc-protecting group: the resin was treated with TFA (50% in CH2Cl2, 2 mL, 2×2 min, rt) and washed with DMF (3×2 mL). To couple each amino acid after Boc removal: the standard in situ neutralization/activation protocol was used. [78] Boc/Fmoc-protected amino acids (4 equiv.), 2-(1H-benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HBTU; 4 equiv.), and DIPEA (6 equiv.) were dissolved in DMF (2 mL). The solution was allowed to pre-activate for 2 min prior to being added to the resin and agitated for 30 min at rt. After each coupling step, the resin was drained and washed with DMF (2×2 mL).
- To remove the Fmoc-protecting group: the resin was treated with piperidine (2 mL of 20% in DMF, 2×10 min) and washed with DMF (3×2 mL). To couple each amino acid after Fmoc removal: Boc/Fmoc-protected amino acids (2 equiv.), HBTU (2 equiv.), and DIPEA (2 equiv.) were dissolved in DMF (2 mL). The solution was allowed to pre-activate for 1 min prior to being added to the resin and agitated for 1 h at rt.
- To couple bromoacetic acid: bromoacetic acid (10 equiv.) was dissolved in DMF (2 mL). DIC (10 equiv.) was added and the solution was pre-activated for 20 min. The solution was added to the resin and the reaction was agitated for 30 min. The resin was drained and the procedure was repeated. The resin was washed with DMF (2×2 mL) and CH2Cl2 (2×2 mL), followed by chloranil test to determine the reaction completion (see procedure below). To couple primary amines to the bromoacetic acid: the amine (10 equiv.) was dissolved in DMF (2 mL). DIPEA (10 equiv.) was added and the solution was allowed to pre-activate for 1 min prior to being added to the resin and agitated overnight using a multi-purpose rotator at 50° C. The resin was washed with DMF (2×2 mL) and CH2Cl2 (2×2 mL), followed by chloranil test to determine the presence of free amines (see procedure below).
- To couple amino acids to secondary amines: Boc/Fmoc-protected amino acids (4 equiv.), 2-(7-Aza-1H-benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU; 4 equiv.), and DIPEA (4 equiv.) were dissolved in DMF (2 mL). The solution was allowed to pre-activate for 1 min prior to being added to the resin and agitated for 2 h at rt. The resin was washed with DMF (2×2 mL) and CH2Cl2 (2×2 mL), followed by chloranil test to determine the reaction completion (see procedure below). If the test indicated that free amines are still present, the procedure was repeated and the reaction was left overnight at 50° C. After the second coupling cycle, peptide elongation was continued even if the chloranil test indicated that free amines are still present.
- To carry out the chloranil test: A sample containing 1-3 mg of the resin was withdrawn and placed into a test tube. Acetaldehyde (2% in DMF; 2 drops) and chloranil (2% in toluene; 2 drops) were added to the sample. The solution was agitated at rt for 5 min. A green or blue color of the beads is a positive indication for the presence of free amines, indicating deprotection of the protecting group or incomplete coupling reaction.
- Upon synthesis of a complete linear peptide sequence, the resin was washed with diethyl ether (1×2 mL) and dried under vacuum for 48 h. The linear peptidyl-resin (90 mg) was placed in a dry, three-neck round bottom flask and suspended in anhydrous CH2Cl2 under argon at rt for 15 min. Me2AlCl (20 equiv., 1 mL of 1 M hexane solution) and anhydrous CH2Cl2 (3 mL) were stirred in a separate, dry round bottom flask under argon for 5 min at 0° C. Ethanethiol (EtSH) (60 equiv.) was added drop-wise at 0° C., and the solution was stirred for 15 min at 0° C. This solution was then added to the suspended resin and stirred under argon for 5 h at rt to effect cleavage of the linear peptide as a thioester. The cleavage product solution was transferred into a new round bottom flask containing a TFA solution (95% (aq.), 3 mL) and the solvents were removed in vacuo to yield a yellow or orange oil. The resulting oil was subjected again to TFA solution (3 mL, 30 min) and filtered from the resin. The resin was washed with TFA solution (1×2 mL) to collect any additional peptide. A cooled solution of diethyl ether:hexane (1:1, 40 mL, 0° C.) was added to the filtrate, and the peptide was allowed to precipitate overnight in a freezer at −20° C. The precipitated peptide solution was centrifuged and the supernatant removed to yield a white solid. This solid was dissolved in ACN (50% (aq.)), lyophilized, redissolved in ACN (50% (aq.)) and purified by semi-preparative RP-HPLC. Collected HPLC fractions were lyophilized to yield the peptide thioester as a white powder (5-20% isolated yields).
- Purified peptidomimetic thioester was dissolved in a 60% guanidinium chloride (6 M solution in 0.1 M phosphate buffer):40% ACN solution to a final concentration ranging from 100 μM to 2 mM. The pH of the solution was then adjusted to 6.8. The peptide was agitated using a multi-purpose rotator at 50° C. for 2 h. The cyclic peptide was purified by semi-preparative RP-HPLC and lyophilized. The resulting white powder was then dissolved in 1M hydrochloric acid (400 μL) and lyophilized.
- The AIP-III nN2 thioester reacted immediately after purification to quantitatively generate an alternative product 17 mass units lower than expected. MS/MS analysis of the final product confirmed that DKP is formed between the N-terminus and the amide of the nAsn residue side chain. A recent study by Bräse and co-workers [79] also reported the formation of DKP when nAsn-type residues were introduced at a position adjacent to the N-terminal residue. The formation of DKP did not hinder the AIP thioester cyclization and produced a bicyclic AIP-III analog after purification.
- Furthermore, in the AIP-III nD4 analog, where the Asp4 residue was replaced with its peptoid residue counterpart (see
FIG. 4 ), DKP formation was not observed despite common understanding that basic conditions enhance amine nucleophilicity and that ester bonds are more susceptible to cleavage than amide bonds.[74, 75, 76] - All standard biological reagents were purchased from Sigma-Aldrich and used according to enclosed instructions. Suspended rabbit blood cells (10%, washed and pooled) were purchased from Lampire Biological Laboratories and stored at 4° C. until use in the hemolysis assay. Reagents for the TSST-1 enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) were purchased from Toxin Technology, Inc. Tryptic soy broth (TSB) and brain heart infusion (BHI) were prepared as instructed with pH=7.35.
- The bacterial strains used in this study are listed in Table 2. Bacterial cultures were grown in a standard laboratory incubator at 37° C. with shaking (200 rpm) unless noted otherwise. The bacterial dilutions and incubation periods were chosen in each assay to provide the greatest dynamic range between positive and negative controls for each bacterial strain. Absorbance and fluorescence measurements were obtained using a
Biotek Synergy 2 microplate reader using Gen5 data analysis software. All biological assays were performed in triplicate. IC50 values were calculated using GraphPad Prism software (v. 4.0) using a sigmoidal curve fit. -
TABLE 2 S. aureus strains used in the biological assays listed according to group. Assay-type Strain Reference Fluorescence group-I AH1677 58 group-II AH430 58, 59 group-III AH1747 58 group-IV AH1972 58 Hemolysis group-I RN6390B 22 group-II RN6923 23 group-III MN8 60 group-IV RN4850 25 β-Lactamase group-I RN9222 49 group-II RN9372 49 group-III RN9532 49 group-IV RN9371 49 - Compound Handling Protocol.
- Stock solutions of synthetic AIP compounds (1 mM) or cyclic dipeptides (10 mM) were prepared in DMSO and stored at 4° C. in sealed vials. The amount of DMSO used in biological screens did not exceed 2% (v/v). Polystyrene 96-well microtiter plates (Costar) were used for screening.
- The ability of compounds (e.g. of Table 1 or
FIG. 4 ) to modulate the activity of the AgrC I-IV receptors was assessed using a fluorescence-based reporter gene assays (described below). Each compound was tested in group I-IV methicillin-resistant S. aureus (MRSA) strains harboring P3-gfp reporter plasmids.[58,59] In these reporter plasmids, the agr P3 promoter, typically upstream of the main QS effector RNAIII, is positioned upstream of gfp. Thus, when bacterial cell densities and AIP concentrations are high, the AIP:AgrC complexes will phosphorylate AgrA, which will then bind P3 and transcribe gfp. GFP fluorescence can then be quantified to determine the extent of AgrC activation, and in these wild-type strains, will be observable in the absence of an exogenous AgrC modulator. Compounds capable of reducing fluorescence levels (or increasing these levels over background), therefore, can be classified as AgrC inhibitors (or activators). - In order to validate the reporter assay conditions and have controls for comparison to the new compounds, the activities of the native AIPs I-IV and the previously reported global inhibitor tAIP-I D2A [49] in also evaluated in each S. aureus reporter strain. The inhibitory trends for these peptides in each of the four AgrC receptors were comparable to previous reports using alternate S. aureus AgrC I-IV reporter strains. [49] Table 3 summarizes the activities of these control peptides and the compounds of the alanine and D-amino acid scans of AIP-III against AgrCs I-IV.
- The reporter gene assay data revealed several interesting SAR trends for AIP-III, and a number of new, global AgrC inhibitors were uncovered with either comparable if not more potent activities than the known inhibitor tAIP-I D2A. There are two components to AIP:AgrC interactions: the initial recognition of an AIP by an AgrC receptor and the resultant induction of allosteric changes within AgrC that drives activation. To explore these components, two different SAR trends were examined: (i cross-inhibition of AgrC-I, -II, and -IV (namely AIP:AgrC recognition), and (ii) activation of AgrC-III (via allosteric changes).
- D-amino acid and alanine replacement of either of the exocyclic tail residues (Ile1 or Asp2) of AIP-III resulted in compounds with similar cross-inhibitory activities to the parent AIP-III (Table 3, IC50 values within error or <10-fold change). In addition, replacement of any one of the three hydrophobic, endocyclic residues in AIP-III (Phe5, Leu6, or Leu7) with alanine resulted in a significant loss of inhibition in groups-I, -II, and -IV (>10-fold change relative to AIP-III). Replacement of Phe5 and Leu6 with their D-amino acid counterparts displayed a >20-fold loss in inhibition in almost every case. However, AIP-III D-L7 displayed analogous inhibitory activities as the parent AIP-III in groups-I, -II and -IV (within error), suggesting that Leu7 may not enforce stereodefined interactions of AIP-III with AgrC receptors. This observation is congruent with previous findings for AIP-I by Williams and co-workers.[24] Two exceptions to these activity trends are noted. Replacing the endocyclic Phe5 or Leu6 with their D-isomers (in AIP-III D-F5 and AIP-III D-L6) neither maintained nor simply abolished inhibitory activity against one receptor, AgrC-II. These two analogs appeared to activate AgrC-II instead. The extent of this activation relative to native AIP could not be fully explored using the gfp-reporter assay, however, as the native AIP signals are produced at normal background levels in the S. aureus AgrC reporter strains (and thus an additive agonistic effect is measured).
- The remaining two residues of AIP-III, Cys3 and Asp4, were found to contribute significantly to cross-receptor inhibition. The replacement of Cys3 with its D-isomer significantly reduced inhibition (>20-fold change relative to native AIP-III; Table 3). This reduction may be due to a conformational change caused by the reversed stereogenic center of cysteine, forcing a change in the orientation of the key hydrophobic residues in the macrocyclic backbone, thereby preventing AIP:AgrC recognition interactions.
- Replacement of Asp4 with its D-isomer also reduced inhibition relative to AIP-III against AgrC-I by 28-fold, yet reduced inhibitory activity to a lesser degree against AgrC-II and AgrC-IV (4- and 3-fold relative to AIP-III, respectively). This result suggests that the stereochemistry of this residue could reinforce optimal orientations of Phe5 and Leu6 for interactions with AgrC-I.
- The remaining two residues of AIP-III, Cys3 and Asp4, were found to contribute significantly to cross-receptor inhibition. The replacement of Cys3 with its D-isomer significantly reduced inhibition (>20-fold change relative to native AIP-III; Table 3). This reduction may be due to a conformational change caused by the reversed stereogenic center of cysteine, forcing a change in the orientation of the key hydrophobic residues in the macrocyclic backbone, thereby preventing AIP:AgrC recognition interactions. Replacement of Asp4 with its D-isomer also reduced inhibition relative to AIP-III against AgrC-I by 28-fold, yet reduced inhibitory activity to a lesser degree against AgrC-III and AgrC-IV (4- and 3-fold relative to AIP-III, respectively). This result suggests that the stereochemistry of this residue could reinforce optimal orientations of Phe5 and Leu6 for interactions with AgrC-l.
- Perhaps more notable, however, was that the replacement of Asp4 with alanine (AIP-III D4A) increased the inhibitory activity of AIP-III by at least 10-fold in each group, delivering a picomolar global AgrC inhibitor. Interestingly, AIP-III D4A contains the identical mutation as the previously reported global inhibitor, tAIP-I D2A (residue numbering shifted (4a→2) due to truncated structure), yet is a ˜10-fold more active inhibitor in each group (Table 3). AIP-III D4A represented not only the most active inhibitor identified in this first series of AIP-III derivatives, but is also, to our knowledge, the most potent AgrC inhibitor to be reported.
-
TABLE 3 IC50 values of the alanine, D-amino acid, N-methyl and peptoid scan derivatives of AIP-III against AgrC I-IV determined using S. aureus fluorescence reporter strains.a AgrC-I AgrC-II AgrC-III AgrC-IV Compound name Sequence IC50 (nM)b IC50 (nM)b IC50 (nM)b IC50 (nM)b AIP-III D-I1 DI-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 8.42 16.4 78.3 77.7 AIP-III D-N2 I-DN-(C-D-F-L-L) 2.15 2.45 17.8 6.23 AIP-III D-C3 I-N-(DC-D-F-L-L) >200 >200 >200 >200 AIP-III D-D4 I-N-(C-DD-F-L-L) 138 24.5 >200 29.2 AIP-III D-F5 I-N-(C-D-DF-L-L) >200 >200c, e >200 174 AIP-III D-L6 I-N-(C-D-F-DL-L) >200 —f >200 >200 AIP-III D-L7 I-N-(C-D-F-L-DL) 12.0 5.36 —f 10.5 AIP-III I1A A-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 17.9 4.26 194 7.85 AIP-III N2A I-A-(C-D-F-L-L) 3.60 0.732 —c, e 3.53 AIP-III D4A I-N-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.485 0.429 0.0506 0.0349 AIP-III F5A I-N-(C-D-A-L-L) >200 >200c >200 118 AIP-III L6A I-N-(C-D-F-A-L) >200 >200 >200 >200 AIP-III L7A I-N-(C-D-F-L-A) >200 >200 >200 >200 AIP-III N-Me-I1b1 NMeI-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 60.8 12.8 >1000c 49.2 AIP-III N-Me-N2b1 I-NMeN-(C-D-F-L-L) 8.04 3.19 —h 9.54 AIP-III N-Me-C3b1 I-N-(NMeC-D-F-L-L) 137 134 —h 106 AIP-III N-Me-D4b1 I-N-(C-NMeD-F-L-L) 172 7.98 90.2 36.9 AIP-III N-Me-F5b1 I-N-(C-D-NMeF-L-L) 4.49 1.95 —h 6.59 AIP-III N-Me-L6b1 I-N-(C-D-F-NMeL-L) >1000c —h 162 81.6 AIP-III N-Me-L7b1 I-N-(C-D-F-L-NMeL) —h —h >1000c _h AIP-III nI1b1 nI-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 44.0 4.25 >1000c 22.2 AIP-III nN2 DKPb1 (I-nN)-(C-D-F-L-L) 126 4.28 25.1 84.8 AIP-III nD4b1 I-N-(C-nD-F-L-L) 162 28.3 206 53.2 AIP-III nF5b1 I-N-(C-D-nF-L-L) 13.8 75.6 >1000c 0.839 AIP-III nL6b1 I-N-(C-D-F-nL-L) —h —h >1000c >1000c AIP-III nL7b1 I-N-(C-D-F-L-nL) —h —h —h —h AIP-Ig Y-S-T-(C-D-F-I-M) — 8.00 0.522 —c, e AIP-IIg G-V-N-A-(C-S-S-L-F) 1.62 — 0.532 0.396 AIP-IIIg I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 5.05 5.63 — 8.53 AIP-IVg Y-S-T-(C-Y-F-I-M) —c, d 0.373 0.460 — tAIP-I D2Ag Ac-(C-A-F-I-M) 3.06 10.1 0.260 0.353 aSee Examples for details of reporter strains and methods. All assays performed in triplicate. bIC50 values determined by testing AIPs over a range of concentrations (200 fM − 10 μM) or b1(2.5 pM − 10 μM). cDose response curve did not reach 100% inhibition over the concentrations tested. dIC50 values are between 100 nM − 1 μM. eInhibition dose response curve upturned at higher concentrations. fDose response curve revealed agonism and no antagonism. gControl compound. hNo inhibition was observed at the concentrations tested. - Analysis of the gfp screening data for the AIP-III analogs also provided valuable SAR trends for the activation of AgrC-III by AIP-III (Table 3). The exocyclic residue Ile1 of AIP-III appeared to play an important role in receptor activation. Replacing this residue with either alanine or the D-amino acid counterpart converted AIP-III to a weak antagonist (IC50 values=194 nM and 78.3 nM, respectively). Converting the exocyclic residue Asn2 to its D-isomer yielded an even stronger AgrC-III antagonist (IC50 value=17.8 nM). However, replacing Asn2 with alanine maintained agonistic activity, suggesting that the stereochemical presentation (and concomitant conformational constraints) of the peptide backbone may be more essential for AgrC-III activation relative to the composition of the Asn2 side chain. Within the AIP-III macrocycle, the two hydrophobic residues Phe5 and Leu6 proved to be crucial for AgrC-III activation, as D-isomer or Ala replacements at either of these residues gave relatively inactive analogs that only weakly inhibited AgrC-III activity (IC50 values >200 nM). In contrast, AIP-III D-L7 maintained the agonistic activity of the parent AIP-III, while AIP-III L7A was largely inactive, similar to the AIP-III F5A and AIP-III L6A mutants. This disparate activity trend suggests that Leu7 may not play as a major of a role in AIP-III:AgrC-III interactions as Phe5 and Leu6.
- Replacement of the AIP-III Cys3 with its D-isomer gave a weakly active inhibitor (IC50 value >200 nM; Table 3), indicating that the stereochemistry of this residue is important to AIP-III:AgrCIII interactions. Similarly, substitution of Asp4 with D-Asp also yielded an inactive analog (IC50 value >200 nM). As discussed above, however, replacing this same residue with alanine (AIP-III D4A) produced the most potent AgrC-III inhibitor in this series (IC50 value=0.0506 nM).
- Together, these SAR trends indicate that Asp4, adjacent to the conserved Cys3 residue, plays a major role in AgrC activation, but not in recognition by the receptor.
- Throughout these SAR analyses, it was assumed that the AIP-III analogs were eliciting their activity through directly binding AgrC receptors and outcompeting the native AIP signals. This is a reasonable assumption in view of the structural relationship of these mutants to the native AIP signals, and has been made in prior studies of AIP-I and -II analogs. However, to provide further support for this hypothesis, we performed a competition assay between the native AIPs and our most potent AgrC-III inhibitor, AIP-III D4A, using the gfp reporter strains. The native AIP signals could be added in a dose-dependent manner to completely eliminate AIP-III D4A inhibition and recover gfp production in each of the four S. aureus groups (see
FIGS. 2A-D ). These data serve to support a competitive mechanism by which AIP-III D4A and the related analogs in this study modulate AgrC activity. - Table 3 also summarizes the activities of these control peptides and the peptido-mimetics of
FIG. 4 . As noted above, exocyclic residues of AIPs are required for cognate activation but not receptor recognition. Consistent with previous observations, peptidomimetics with modifications to the exocyclic tail residues had activities similar to the parent AIP-III. AIP-III nN2 could not be directly evaluated, but note that the bicyclic AIP-III nN2 DKP significantly lost ability to inhibit AgrC-I (>20-fold change). - With respect to changes in the macrocycle, the importance of the conserved cysteine and three hydrophobic residues was confirmed as most of such modifications resulted in significant reduction of potency (>9-fold change). Furthermore, modifications of Leu6 resulted in AgrC-III agonists, an observation similar to that observed on its replacement with the D-amino acid. While, Phe5 could not be mutated to a D-amino acid or alanine without loss of activity, Phe5 could be mutated with peptidomimetics. For example, the replacement of Phe5 with the N-methyl analog had no effect on inhibition relative to AIP-III (IC50 values within error) and the insertion of a peptoid residue resulted in a picomolar group-IV inhibitor. AIP-III nF5 was the most potent inhibitor identified for any group in these studies and displayed enhanced potency for AgrC-IV only (versus AIP-III: 10-fold increased potency for AgrC-IV, within error for AgrC-I, and 13-fold reduction for AgrC-II). In contrast replacement of Leu7 with the N-methylated or peptoid analog abolished inhibition where peptoid insertion resulted in an AgrC-II agonist. The combined results indicate that the side chain of Phe5 (but not the backbone) is the important component of this residue, and the backbone is the important component of Leu7. Based on these results, the AIP segment spanning from the Phe5 α-carbon to the nitrogen atom of Leu7 appears to be the basis for AgrC recognition.
- The SAR analysis also provided information related to AgrC-III activation by AIP-III. Agonism of AgrC-III was not detected for any of the backbone-modified analogs, indicating that hydrogen bonding throughout the entire sequence is important for activation. However, the utilization of wild-type bacteria in our assay prevents accurate assessment of this phenomenon. Furthermore, of the 13 peptidomimetic analogs of
FIG. 4 , only AIP-III nN2 DKP was found to be an AgrC-III inhibitor. This analog also significantly reduced TSST-1 production by a group-III S. aureus strain in low μM concentrations. - Examination of the peptidomimetics of
FIG. 4 identified group-selective inhibitors. Two selective inhibitors were identified after replacement of Asp4 with either the N-methyl amino acid or the corresponding peptoid: AIP-III N-Me D4 and AIP-III nD4, respectively. These compounds were both selective AgrC-III and -IV inhibitors (IC50 values for AgrC-I and -III were greater than 100 nM). This result is consistent with observation regarding the replacement of Asp4 with its D-stereoisomer, which only exhibited weak inhibition activity against AgrC-I, but maintained antagonism activity against AgrC-III and -IV in the gfp reporter assay. The intolerance of AgrC-I to changes at Asp4 may be attributable to the sequence of the cognate AIP that has an Asp residue at the same position. Additionally an AgrC-IV selective inhibitor, AIP-III N-Me-L6, was identified on N-methylation of Leu6 of AIP-III. The selectivity obtained through this subtle change in the AIP structure emphasizes the specificity of the interactions between the AIPs and the AgrC receptors. Further, two partially selective inhibitors, AIP-III nF5 and AIP-III nN2 DKP (IC50 values vary significantly between the groups) were identified. Group-selective inhibitors, for example, are useful as research reagents to study the agr QS circuit of S. aureus in mixed bacterial milieu. Group-selective inhibitors provide a method to temporally evaluate mixed strains to probe not only strain-strain competition, but also to assess the role of QS timing on a strain's success or failure in such competition. - Compounds of Table 1 with double and triple alanine changes, alternate aromatic residues in place of Phe5, and truncated and elongated exocyclic tails were evaluated in the four S. aureus gfp-reporter strains for inhibitory activity against AgrC-I-IV. The results of these assays are shown in Table 4; data for AIP-III D4A, and the previously reported inhibitor, tAIP-I D2A, are included for comparison.
-
TABLE 4 IC50 values of the second-generation AIP-III analogues against AgrC I-IV determined using S. aureus fluorescence reporter strains.a AgrC-I AgrC-II AgrC-III AgrC-IV Compound name Sequence IC50 (nM)b IC50 (nM)b IC50 (nM)b IC50 (nM)b AIP-III I1A/N2A A-A-(C-D-F-L-L) 7.40 4.38 2.60 5.41 AIP-III I1A/D4A A-N-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.328 2.35 0.280 0.101 AIP-III N2A/D4A I-A-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.331 0.204 0.0657 0.0221 AIP-III I1A/N2A/D4A A-A-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.304 0.604 0.0734 0.0161 tAIP-III Ac-(C-D-F-L-L) 26.7 1.53 >200 25.5 tAIP-III D2A Ac-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.257 0.900 0.329 0.0957 tAIP-III D2A/F3Y Ac-(C-A-Y-L-L) 0.279 1.15 0.387 0.0306 tAIP-Ill D2A/F3W Ac-(C-A-W-L-L) 0.909 1.90 0.509 0.0363 Ac-AIP-III Ac-I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) >200 44.3 >200 >200 G-AIP-III G-I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 29.9 13.7 >200c 104 A-AIP-III A-I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 26.1 6.40 27.5d 28.5d Y-AIP-III Y-I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 8.92 3.75 39.2 78.2c AIP-III D4Ae I-N-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.485 0.429 0.0506 0.0349 tAIP-I D2Ae Ac-(C-A-F-I-M) 3.06 10.1 0.260 0.353 aSee Experimental Section for details of reporter strains and methods. All assays performed in triplicate. bIC50 values determined by testing AIPs over a range of concentrations (200 fM − 10 μM). cDose response curve did not reach 100% inhibition over the concentrations tested. dAntagonism dose response curve upturned at higher concentrations. eData included for comparison. - The analogs with double and triple alanine mutations (Table 4, Rows 1-4) were designed to examine whether simultaneously replacing multiple amino acid residues with alanine would result in an additive effect on compound activity. Replacing both exocyclic residues (Ile1 and Asn2) in AIP-III with alanine yielded an analog (AIP-III I1A/N2A) with an IC50 value between those of the parent single alanine mutants for AgrC-I, -II, and -IV (see Tables 3 and 4). In contrast, AIP-III I1A/N2A was a much more potent inhibitor against AgrC-III (IC50=2.60 nM) relative to the single alanine mutants (I1A, IC50=194 nM; N2A=weak agonist). Introducing a D4A mutation along with these exocyclic alanine mutations (Table 4, Rows 2-4) yielded analogs with antagonistic activities analogous to the AIP-III D4A parent mutant, regardless of other mutations (within error for all except AIP-III I1A/D4A against AgrC-II, with a <5-fold change), indicating that the inclusion of D4A may convert every AIP-III mutant to cross-group AgrC inhibitor.
- Four truncated AIP-III derivatives lacking exocyclic tails were prepared to explore whether this modification, as shown for AIP-I, -II and -IV,[49] could broaden their inhibitory scope against cognate and non-cognate AgrC receptors (Table 4, Rows 5-8). Such an analysis of the native AIP-III is yet to be reported. It was found that the truncated AIP-III (tAIP-III) was largely inactive in its cognate receptor, AgrC-III. Moreover, no significant activity change between tAIP-III and native AIP-III against AgrC-II and -IV was observed, and slightly diminished activity for tAIP-III relative to native AIP-III against AgrC-I (26.7 nM v. 5.05 nM, respectively) was observed. These data suggest that the exocyclic tail of AIP-III does not play a major role in cross-group inhibition. The inclusion of the D4A mutation in the truncated AIP-III produced a potent global AgrC inhibitor (termed tAIP-III D2A; <1 nM for all groups; note, residue numbering shifted due to truncation), with activity within error of its full-length analog (AIP-III D4A) in AgrC-I, -II, and -IV and only somewhat reduced for group-III (0.329 nM v. 0.0506 nM, respectively). This truncated AIP-III analog represents a more structurally streamlined, peptide-based AgrC inhibitor.
- To explore SARs for the potent inhibitor tAIP-III D2A, Phe3 was replaced with other aromatic amino acids (Tyr or Trp) to determine the role of this residue in inhibitory activity. These two analogs (tAIP-III D2A/F3Y and tAIP-III D2AF3W) displayed similar inhibitory activities in the gfp-reporter assays as the parent analog. These data, along with the alanine scan data above, suggest that bulky, aromatic residues are important at the Phe3 (or Phe5) position for AgrC inhibition by AIP-III analogs, but that the residue identity is not critical.
- Four elongated AIP-III analogs with either an acetyl, glycine, alanine, or tyrosine extension at the N-terminus of AIP-III. The tyrosine-extended AIP-III (Y-AIP-III) was a moderate antagonist of AgrC-III in the gfp-reporter assay. In contrast, the acetylated and glycine variants (Ac-AIP-III and G-AIP-III) were largely inactive in AgrC-III, and the alanine-extended AIP (A-AIP-III) was actually a partial agonist of AgrC-III instead. When evaluated for modulatory activity in the non-cognate AgrC receptors, Ac-AIP-III was the least active (>200 nM for group-I and -IV and 44.3 nM for group-II), implying that a free N-terminus is important for recognition. None of the amino acid AIP-III analogs showed improved inhibition compared to the parent AIP-III, and G-AIP-III was the least potent extended amino acid analog overall. Interestingly, the A-AIP-III, but not Y-AIP-III- (Tyr being first amino acid in the native AIP-IV octapeptide sequence), actually displayed partial agonism in AgrC-IV.
- Peptide stock solutions were diluted with DMSO in serial dilutions (either 1:3, 1:5, or 1:10), and 2 μL of the diluted solution was added to each of the wells in a black 96-well microtiter plate. An overnight culture of S. aureus gfp strain was diluted 1:50 with fresh TSB (pH 7.35). A 198-μL portion of diluted culture was added to each well of the microtiter plate containing peptide. Plates were incubated at 37° C. for 24 h. Fluorescence (EX 500 nm/EM 540 nm) and OD600 of each well was then recorded using a plate reader and IC50 values were calculated. For the competition assays, 2 μL of AIP-III D4A stock solution was added to wells in a black 96-well microtiter plate to final concentrations of 2 nM (group-I and -II strains) or 0.3 nM (group-III and -IV strains). Native AIP (I-IV) stock solutions were diluted with DMSO in serial dilutions (1:3 dilutions) and added to the wells containing AIP-III D4A. The fluorescence assay was carried out as described above in the four respective S. aureus reporter strains.
- The response of S. aureus gfp-reporters may not accurately reflect physiologically relevant QS phenotypes. Previous studies have established that the production of hemolysins is regulated by the agr QS system.[18-20] Therefore, analogs that inhibit the agr system should also block the production of hemolysins in S. aureus. Inhibition of the agr system should then be readily quantitated by hemolysis assays using red blood cells. To this end, a standard bacterial hemolysis assay was modified to a 96-well microtiter plate format to expedite compound screening [65, 66] All 13 compounds evaluated in Table 3 were further evaluated for their ability to inhibit hemolysis by S. aureus. Wild-type strains of S. aureus groups-I-IV were treated with compounds to be tested and the cultures were then assessed for hemolysin activity. Rabbit red blood cells were incubated with peptide-treated bacterial cultures (˜15 min) in a microtiter plate, after which the samples were pelleted by centrifugation. The culture supernatant was then transferred to new plates, and the concentration of free heme (directly correlated with red blood cell lysis) was quantified by measuring absorbance at 420 nm. Similar to the gfp-reporter assays outlined above, the native AIPs (I-IV) and the previously reported global inhibitor tAIP-I D2A as controls in the hemolysis assays. Table 5 summarizes the hemolysis assay data.
- With a few minor exceptions, the relative IC50 value trends for the controls and AIP analogs in the hemolysis assay were largely identical to those in the gfp-reporter assays. Note that the two sets of assay data came from different bacterial strains, and thus strain-to-strain variations could account for the slight deviations observed. The most potent AgrC inhibitors identified in the gfp-reporter assays were capable of completely inhibiting hemolysis in the S. aureus strains at nanomolar concentrations or lower. For example, the global S. aureus QS inhibitor identified in the gfp-reporter assay, AIP-III D4A, inhibited hemolysis in all four groups at subnanomolar concentrations (IC50 value <0.2 nM). This peptide was three-fold more active than the previously reported global inhibitor, tAIP-I D2A, in the hemolysis assay in the group IV strain; more strikingly, it was 40-fold more active in the group-II strain. These data are significant, as they indicate that AIP-III D4A and other compounds of this invention are capable of blocking an important QS phenotype directly linked to virulence in wild-type S. aureus strains.
-
TABLE 5 IC50 values of the alanine and D-amino acid scan analogs of AIP-III against AgrC I-IV determined using the hemolysis assay.a Compound Sequence AgrC-I AgrC-II AgrC-III AgrC-IV IC50 (nM)b IC50 (nM)b IC50 (nM)b IC50 (nM)b AIP-III D-I1 DI-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 18.4 2.67 >200c >200 AIP-III D-N2 I-DN-(C-D-F-L-L) 5.31 0.222 —c, d 23.1 AIP-III D-C3 I-N-(DC-D-F-L-L) >200 122 >200 >200 AIP-III D-D4 I-N-(C-DD-F-L-L) 77.0 1.15 >200 >200d AIP-III D-F5 I-N-(C-D-DF-L-L) >200 >200 >200 >200 AIP-III D-L6 I-N-(C-D-F-DL-L) >200 >200 >200 >200 AIP-III D-L7 I-N-(C-D-F-L-DL) 29.3 1.96 —e 47.8 AIP-III I1A A-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 4.61 1.29 —f 12.5 AIP-III N2A I-A-(C-D-F-L-L) 1.02 0.137 —c, d 2.64 AIP-III D4A I-N-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.0820 0.0596 0.163 0.106 AIP-III F5A I-N-(C-D-A-L-L) >200 44.7 >200 >200 AIP-III L6A I-N-(C-D-F-A-L) >200 >200 >200 >200 AIP-III L7A I-N-(C-D-F-L-A) >200 >200 >200 >200 AIP-Ig Y-S-T-(C-D-F-I-M) — 3.34 6.12 189 AIP-IIg G-V-N-A-(C-S-S-L-F) 0.890 — 3.59 1.19 AIP-IIIg I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 8.07 0.456 — 23.8 AIP-IVg Y-S-T-(C-Y-F-I-M) —c, d 0.0897 1.49 — tAIP-I D2Ag Ac-(C-A-F-I-M) 1.45 2.50 0.853 0.361 aSee Experimental Section for details of reporter strains and methods. All assays performed in triplicate. bIC50 values determined by testing AIPs over a range of concentrations (200 fM − 10 μM). cDose response curve did not reach 100% inhibition over the concentrations tested. dDose response curve upturned at higher concentrations. eDose response curve revealed agonism and no inhibition. fNo activity at any concentration tested up to at least 10 μM. gControl compound. - The most potent AgrC inhibitors from Table 4 (IC50 values less than 1 nM) were also evaluated in the S. aureus hemolysis assay (Table 6). The trends for these compounds analogs in the hemolysis and gfp-reporter assays are largely consistent. The hemolysis assay did unmask variances between certain potent compounds. For example, AIP-III I1A/D4A inhibited hemolysis in group-I at eightfold lower concentrations than the original AIP-III D4A analog (0.0103 nM v. 0.0820 nM, respectively), a discrepancy that was not observed in the gfp reporter assays (0.328 nM v. 0.485 nM), suggesting that double mutants may enhance the inhibitory activity of AIP-III analogs. AIP-III D-D4 was a strong AgrC-IV antagonist in the gfp assay (IC50 value=29.2 nM), but displayed partial agonism in the hemolysis assay (IC50 value >200 nM).
-
TABLE 6 IC50 values of selected second-generation AIP-III analogues against AgrC I-IV determined using the hemolysis assay.a AgrC-II AgrC-III AgrC-IV AgrC-I IC50 IC50 IC50 Compound Sequence IC50 (nM)b (nM)b (nM)b (nM)b AIP-III I1A/D4A A-N-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.0103 0.793 0.551 0.284 AIP-III N2A/D4A I-A-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.0362 0.0661 0.216 0.122 AIP-III I1A/N2A/D4A A-A-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.0411 0.0606 0.243 0.140 tAIP-III D2A Ac-(C-A-F-L-L) 0.332 0.711 0.197 0.306 tAIP-III D2A/F3Y Ac-(C-A-Y-L-L) 0.279 0.204 0.265 0.134 tAIP-III D2A/F3W Ac-(C-A-W-L-L) 0.468 0.126 1.08 0.194 aSee Experimental Section for details of reporter strains and methods. All assays performed in triplicate. bIC50 values determined by testing AIPs over a range of concentrations (200 fM − 10 μM). - Representative Assay Protocol.
- Peptide stock solutions were diluted with DMSO in serial dilutions (either 1:3, 1:5, or 1:10 dilutions). For hemolysis assays, 2 μL of diluted peptide solution was added to each of the wells in a 96-well microtiter plate. An overnight culture of S. aureus wild-type strain was diluted with fresh TSB (pH 7.35) (1:10, 1:25 or 1:100, assay conditions dependent on strain (see Table 7). A 198-μL portion of the diluted culture was added to each well of the microtiter plate containing peptides.
-
TABLE 7 Conditions for hemolysis assay Culture + red blood Bacteria + AIPs cells incubation Dilution of culture Incubation time time S. aureus strain with TSB (h) (min) RN6390B (group-I) 1:100 8 15 RN9623 (group-II) 1:25 8 15 MN8 (group-III) 1:10 6 25 RN4850 (group-IV) 1:10 6 15 TSB = tryptic soy broth. - Plates were incubated statically at 37° C. for 6-8 h. The cultures were then assayed for hemolytic activity. Suspended rabbit red blood cells (1 mL) were centrifuged (2,000 rpm, 2 min, 25° C., 450 g), the supernatant was removed, and the cells were resuspended in saline phosphate buffer (PBS, pH=7.35, 1 mL). After the OD600 of each well of the 96-well microtiter plate was recorded, a 13-μL portion of the suspended red blood cells was added to each well. After 15-25 min (see Table 7) of static incubation at 37° C., the microtiter plates were centrifuged to pellet the cells (4 min, 25° C., 450 g). A 150-μL portion of supernatant from each well of culture was transferred to a fresh 96-well microtiter plate. Absorbance at 420 nm was measured for each well using a plate reader and IC50 values were calculated.
- The production of TSST-1 is a hallmark QS phenotype S. aureus group-III. The four most potent AgrC inhibitors identified above (AIP-III D4A, tAIP-III D2A, AIP-III N2A/D4A, and AIPIIII1A/N2A/D4A) were evaluated for the capability of reducing the production of TSST-1 in group-III S. aureus. A wild-type group-III S. aureus strain (MN8) known to produce TSST-1 in the presence of each AIP-III analog (at 1 and 10 nM), and quantitated toxin production using a standard sandwich-type ELISA assay with a commercially available anti-TSST-1 antibody. The results of these assays are shown in
FIG. 3 , and show that all four AIP-III analogs are capable of strongly inhibiting TSST production (by >80%) in this group-III S. aureus strain at 10 nM. Moreover, two analogs, AIP-III D4A and tAIP-III D2A, maintained 80% reduction of TSST-1 levels at 1 nM. - These ELISA data are significant, as they demonstrate that compounds of this invention are capable of inhibiting TSST-1 production in S. aureus. Previously, bacterial supernatants containing the naturally occurring cyclic dipeptides (cyclo-(Tyr-Pro) and cyclo-(Phe-Pro)) were reported by McCormick and co-workers.[29] to reduce TSST-1 production levels by ˜80% using an analogous ELISA assay. The purified cyclic dipeptides, however, were not tested in the ELISA. To perform a more quantitative comparison of the most potent AIP-III analogs to these cyclic peptides, pure samples of cyclo-(Tyr-Pro) or cyclo-(PhePro) were subjected to the ELISA protocol, and it was found that 100 μM concentrations were required to reduce TSST production by ˜50% or 80%, respectively (see
FIG. 3 ). These data indicate that the compounds of this invention tested are at least 1000-fold more potent than the cyclic dipeptides in the ELISA, and thus represent some of the most potent inhibitors of TSST-1 production in S. aureus to be reported. - The TSST-1 ELISA protocol was based in part on the procedure supplied by the toxin producer (Toxin Technologies, Inc.), with some modifications. Peptide stock solutions (AIP-III analog or cyclic dipeptide control) were diluted with DMSO to the desired concentration, and 20 μL of the diluted solutions was added to 15-mL Falcon tubes. An overnight culture of S. aureus MN8 was diluted 1:100 with fresh BHI (pH 7.35), and a 1-mL portion of diluted culture was added to each Falcon tube containing peptide. The cultures were incubated at 37 □C for 24 h. Simultaneously, rabbit polyclonal anti-TSST-1 IgG (100 μL, 10 μg/mL in coating buffer (0.01M sodium carbonate, pH 9.6)) was added to a 96-well ELISA plate and incubated with shaking (200 rpm) in a humid chamber at 37° C. for 18 h. The ELISA plate was then washed 3× (300 μL each, PBS solution containing 0.05% Tween-20, PBS-Tween). To block the plate, bovine serum albumin (BSA, 1% in PBS-Tween, 100 μL) was added to each well and incubated for 15 min at rt, after which it was washed 3× again with PBS-Tween (300 μL each). The bacterial cultures were centrifuged to pellet the cells (10 min, 25° C., 450 g), and the supernatants were sterile filtered. The supernatants were diluted 1:10 in normal rabbit serum (NRS, 1% in PBS-Tween) and incubated for 15 min at rt. The incubated solutions were further diluted using PBS-Tween to a total dilution of 1:100 to 1:2,000. The diluted supernatant samples (100 μL) and TSST-1 standards with known concentrations (ranging from 10 ng/mL to 0.32 ng/mL, 100 μL) were added to the ELISA plate and incubated with shaking (200 rpm) in a humid chamber at 37° C. for 2 h. After incubation, the plate was washed 3× with PBS-Tween, and anti-TSST-1 IgG horseradish peroxidase conjugate (100 μL, 3.33 μg/mL) was added and incubated with shaking (200 rpm) in a humid chamber at 37° C. for 1 h. The plate was washed 5× with PBS-Tween, after which 2,2′-azinobis(3-ethylbenzthiazoline-sulfonic acid) (ABTS solution, 100 μL) was added and incubated at rt for 15 min. Absorbance at 405 nm was measured using a plate reader, and a TSST-1 standard curve was constructed for each assay plate using the data of the TSST-1 reference standards. (The R2 of linear regression analysis for these data was >0.99.) The TSST-1 concentration in the test samples were then determined from the regression equation and presented as a percentage of the TSST-1 concentration in the untreated cultures.
- Peptidomimetic compounds of
FIG. 4 that displayed <100% inhibition of gfp production in the wild-type strains were assessed for agonistic activity using a set of S. aureus group-I agr-null strains each carrying a plasmid containing a P3-blaZ fusion (to confer β-lactamase activity in response to AgrC activation) and agrCA from groups-I, -II, -III, or -IV. [46, 49]. None of peptidomimetics ofFIG. 4 were able to activate the non-cognate AgrC receptors in the activation assay. Only the ability of the N-methyl and peptoid scans of AIP-III to activate the AgrC-III receptor is presented in Table 8. - Four of the compounds tested were found to activate AgrC-III. N-methylation of Asn2 produced an analog with enhanced activity compared to AIP-III (Table 8), combined with the relatively high antagonistic activity of AIP-III nN2 DKP, this result suggests that N-alkylation of Asn2 is beneficial for AgrC-III interactions. N-methylation of Cys3 resulted in an analog with reduced activity compared to AIP-III (>10-fold change, Table 5), further highlighting the importance of this residue for effective AgrC receptor recognition. Modifying Phe5 did not hamper the ability of the resulting analogs to activate AgrC-III (Table 8). This result is consistent with the hypothesis that the AIP segment spanning from the Phe5 α-carbon to the nitrogen atom of Leu7 is the basis for AgrC recognition.
-
TABLE 8 EC50 values for the N-methyl and peptoid scan analogs of AIP-III against AgrC-III determined using a β-lactamase reporter strain.a AgrC-III Peptide name Sequence EC50 (nM)b AIP-III I-N-(C-D-F-L-L) 102 AIP-III N-Me-N2 I-NMeN-(C-D-F-L-L) 19.0 AIP-III N-Me-C3 I-N-(NMeC-D-F-L-L) >1000 AIP-III N-Me-F5 I-N-(C-D-NMeF-L-L) 49.6 AIP-III nF5 I-N-(C-D-nF-L-L) 202 aExample 7 for details of reporter strains, and experimental procedures. All assays performed in triplicate. bEC50 values determined by testing AIPs over a range of concentrations (2.5 pM − 10 μM). - Peptide stock solutions were diluted with DMSO in serial dilutions (1:5), and 2 μL of the diluted solution was added to each of the wells in a clear 96-well microtiter plate. An overnight culture of S. aureus β-Lactamase strain was diluted 1:50 with fresh BHI (pH 7.35) and the bacteria was incubated in a shaker until it reaches early exponential phase (OD600=0.16). A 50-μL portion of culture was added to each well of the microtiter plate containing peptide. Plates were incubated at 37° C. for 1 h. OD600 of each well was recorded using a plate reader, followed by the addition of sodium azide (5 μL of 50 mM solution) and Nitrocefin solution (50 μL of 132 μg/mL in 0.1 M sodium phosphate buffer, pH 5.8). The plate was shaken in an incubator at 37° C. in the dark for 20 min, the absorbance (495 nm) of each well was then recorded and EC50 values were calculated.
- Synthetic methods described above were employed to prepare compounds of Formula V, and VA-C which are illustrated in
FIG. 5 .Scheme 3 illustrates the application of these methods to the synthesis of these compounds. -
FIG. 5 illustrates the naming scheme for certain compounds of Formula V which is used in Table 9. Table 9 provides a comparison of activity of certain compounds of formula V for inhibition of AgrC Receptor Groups of S. aureus. Table 9 lists % activation for each listed compound for AgrC groups I-IV. Percent activation is a comparison of fluorescence measurements (performed essentially as described in Example 4) of treated bacteria to non-treated wild-type bacteria (S. Aureus) which produce native-ligand which activates QS in the absence of an inhibitor; a lower % activation indicates more potent inhibition. This study identifies several compounds which potently inhibit AgrC receptors at the nM level. Specifically compound designated n3LF is a global inhibitor of all four AgrC receptors. Specifically, the compound designated n2LF is a selective group-II inhibitor. Specifically, the compounds d designated n5LF and n7LF are selective group-III inhibitors. Structures of certain compounds of formula V are listed below indicating IC50 values for inhibition of listed AgrC receptors: -
TABLE 9 Comparison of Relative Inhibition of Compounds of Formula V for AgrC groups Compound AgrC-Ia AgrC-IIa AgrC-IIIa AgrC-IVa designation % Activation % Activation % Activation % Activation n1LF 114 ± 21 117 ± 25 137 ± 14 115 ± 9 n2LF 104 ± 15 2 ± 0 138 ± 9 99 ± 14 n3LF 17 ± 7 28 ± 10 13 ± 7 6 ± 3 n4LF 99 ± 30 88 ± 52 120 ± 28 110 ± 14 n5LF 76 ± 42 78 ± 37 6 ± 3 120 ± 19 n6LF 69 ± 20 3 ± 0 6 ± 3 80 ± 21 n7LF 54 ± 34 43 ± 25 7 ± 3 98 ± 14 n1LL 108 ± 14 72 ± 20 139 ± 35 119 ± 17 n2LL 87 ± 20 83 ± 30 88 ± 9 110 ± 7 n3LL 86 ± 24 62 ± 14 113 ± 10 119 ± 11 n4LL 80 ± 9 75 ± 22 83 ± 16 102 ± 10 n5LL 87 ± 10 88 ± 24 105 ± 40 119 ± 17 n6LL 81 ± 18 82 ± 40 107 ± 23 129 ± 15 n7LL 103 ± 64 76 ± 28 117 ± 28 122 ± 15 n1LI 90 ± 13 82 ± 22 141 ± 32 141 ± 18 n2LI 89 ± 61 44 ± 23 135 ± 42 130 ± 17 n3LI 72 ± 19 64 ± 18 106 ± 13 126 ± 18 n4LI 55 ± 8 36 ± 18 106 ± 48 132 ± 18 n5LI 60 ± 6 31 ± 12 43 ± 9 70 ± 28 n6LI 68 ± 16 41 ± 13 93 ± 26 133 ± 17 n7LI 126 ± 57 92 ± 72 109 ± 19 103 ± 4 a% Activation is a comparison of fluorescence of treated bacteria to non-treated wild-type bacteria (S. Aureus) which produce native-ligand which activates QS in the absence of an inhibitor; a lower % activation indicates more potent inhibition. -
- (1) Ng, W. L.; Bassler, B. L. Annu. Rev. Genet. 2009, 43, 197-222.
- (2) Bassler, B. L.; Losick, R. Cell 2006, 125, 237-246.
- (3) Camilli, A.; Bassler, B. L. Science 2006, 311, 1113-1116.
- (4) Eberhard, A.; Burlingame, A. L.; Eberhard, C.; Kenyon, G. L.; Nealson, K. H.; Oppenheimer,
N. J. Biochemistry 1981, 20, 2444-2449. - (5) Marketon, M. M.; Gronquist, M. R.; Eberhard, A.; Gonzalez, J. E. J. Bacteriol. 2002, 184, 5686-5695.
- (6) Joint, I.; Downie, J. A.; Williams, P. Philos. Trans. R. Soc. Lond. B. Biol. Sci. 2007, 362, 1115-1117.
- (7) von Bodman, S. B.; Willey, J. M.; Diggle, S. P. J. Bacteriol. 2008, 190, 4377-4391.
- (8) Boyer, M.; Wisniewski-Dye, F. FEMS Microbiol Ecol 2009, 70, 1-19.
- (9) De Kievit, T. R.; Iglewski, B. H. Infect. Immun. 2000, 68, 4839-4849.
- (10) Bjarnsholt, T.; Givskov, M. Anal. Bioanal. Chem. 2007, 387, 409-414.
- (11) Hibbing, M. E.; Fuqua, C.; Parsek, M. R.; Peterson, S. B. Nat. Rev. Microbiol. 2010, 8, 15-25.
- (12) Njoroge, J.; Sperandio, V. EMBO Mol. Med. 2009, 1, 201-210.
- (13) Wright, G. D. Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 2003, 7, 563-569.
- (14) Walsh,
C. Nature 2000, 406, 775-781. - (15) Rotun, S. S.; McMath, V.; Schoonmaker, D. J.; Maupin, P. S.; Tenover, F. C.; Hill, B. C.; Ackman, D. M. Emerg. Infect. Dis. 1999, 5, 147-149.
- (16) Chambers, H. F.; Deleo, F. R. Nat. Rev. Microbiol. 2009, 7, 629-641.
- (17) Deleo, F. R.; Chambers, H. F. J. Clin. Invest. 2009, 119, 2464-2474.
- (18) Recsei, P.; Kreiswirth, B.; O'Reilly, M.; Schlievert, P.; Gruss, A.; Novick, R. P. Mol. Gen. Genet. 1986, 202, 58-61.
- (19) Pragman, A. A.; Schlievert, P. M. FEMS Immunol. Med. Microbiol. 2004, 42, 147-154.
- (20) George, E. A.; Muir, T. W. ChemBioChem 2007, 8, 847-855.
- (21) Lina, G.; Jarraud, S.; Ji, G. Y.; Greenland, T.; Pedraza, A.; Etienne, J.; Novick, R. P.; Vandenesch, F. Mol. Microbiol. 1998, 28, 655-662.
- (22) Novick, R. P.; Ross, H. F.; Projan, S. J.; Kornblum, J.; Kreiswirth, B.; Moghazeh, S. EMBO J. 1993, 12, 3967-3975.
- (23) Ji, G.; Beavis, R.; Novick, R. P. Science 1997, 276, 2027-2030.
- (24) McDowell, P.; Affas, Z.; Reynolds, C.; Holden, M. T.; Wood, S. J.; Saint, S.; Cockayne, A.; Hill, P. J.; Dodd, C. E.; Bycroft, B. W.; Chan, W. C.; Williams, P. Mol. Microbiol. 2001, 41, 503-512.
- (25) Jarraud, S.; Lyon, G. J.; Figueiredo, A. M.; Gerard, L.; Vandenesch, F.; Etienne, J.; Muir, T. W.; Novick, R. P. J. Bacteriol. 2000, 182, 6517-6522.
- (26) Jarraud, S.; Mougel, C.; Thioulouse, J.; Lina, G.; Meugnier, H.; Forey, F.; Nesme, X.; Etienne, J.; Vandenesch, F. Infect. Immun. 2002, 70, 631-641.
- (27) Holtfreter, S.; Grumann, D.; Schmudde, M.; Nguyen, H. T. T.; Eichler, P.; Strommenger, B.; Kopron, K.; Kolata, J.; Giedrys-Kalemba, S.; Steinmetz, I.; Witte, W.; Broker, B. M. J. Clin. Microbiol. 2007, 45, 2669-2680.
- (28) Limbago, B.; Fosheim, G. E.; Schoonover, V.; Crane, C. E.; Nadle, J.; Petit, S.; Heltzel, D.; Ray, S. M.; Harrison, L. H.; Lynfield, R.; Dumyati, G.; Townes, J. M.; Schaffner, W.; Mu, Y.; Fridkin, S. K. J. Clin. Microbiol. 2009, 47, 1344-1351.
- (29) Li, J. R.; Wang, W. L.; Xu, S. X.; Magarvey, N. A.; McCormick, J. K. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A 2011, 108, 3360-3365.
- (30) Musser, J. M.; Schlievert, P. M.; Chow, A. W.; Ewan, P.; Kreiswirth, B. N.; Rosdahl, V. T.; Naidu, A. S.; Witte, W.; Selander, R. K. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A 1990, 87, 225-229.
- (31) Galloway, W. R.; Hodgkinson, J. T.; Bowden, S. D.; Welch, M.; Spring, D. R. Chem. Rev. 2011, 111, 28-67.
- (32) Geske, G. D.; O'Neill, J. C.; Blackwell, H. E. Chem. Soc. Rev. 2008, 37, 1432-1447.
- (33) Persson, T.; Givskov, M.; Nielsen, J. Curr. Med. Chem. 2005, 12, 3103-3115.
- (34) Stevens, A. M.; Queneau, Y.; Soulere, L.; von Bodman, S.; Doutheau, A. Chem. Rev. 2011, 111, 4-27.
- (35) Amara, N.; Krom, B. P.; Kaufmann, G. F.; Meijler, M. M. Chem. Rev. 2011, 111, 195-208.
- (36) Sintim, H. O.; Smith, J. A.; Wang, J.; Nakayama, S.; Yan, L. Future Med. Chem. 2010, 2, 1005-1035.
- (37) Rasko, D. A.; Sperandio, V. Nat. Rev. Drug Disc. 2010, 9, 117-128.
- (38) Kaufmann, G. F.; Park, J.; Janda, K. D. Exp. Opin. Biol. Ther. 2008, 8, 719-724.
- (39) Geske, G. D.; O'Neill, J. C.; Miller, D. M.; Mattmann, M. E.; Blackwell, H. E. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2007, 129, 13613-13625.
- (40) Geske, G. D.; O'Neill, J. C.; Miller, D. M.; Wezeman, R. J.; Mattmann, M. E.; Lin, Q.; Blackwell, H. E. ChemBioChem 2008, 9, 389-400.
- (41) Mattmann, M. E.; Blackwell, H. E. J. Org. Chem. 2010, 75, 6737-6746.
- (42) Palmer, A. G.; Streng, E.; Blackwell, H. E. ACS Chem. Biol. 2011, 6, 1348-1356.
- (43) Stacy, D. M.; Welsh, M. A.; Rather, P. N.; Blackwell, H. E. ACS Chem. Biol. 2012, in press.
- (44) Park, J.; Jagasia, R.; Kaufmann, G. F.; Mathison, J. C.; Ruiz, D. I.; Moss, J. A.; Meijler, M. M.; Ulevitch, R. J.; Janda, K. D. Chem. Biol. 2007, 14, 1119-1127.
- (45) Mayville, P.; Ji, G.; Beavis, R.; Yang, H.; Goger, M.; Novick, R. P.; Muir, T. W. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A 1999, 96, 1218-1223.
- (46) Lyon, G. J.; Mayville, P.; Muir, T. W.; Novick, R. P. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A 2000, 97, 13330-13335.
- (47) Wright, J. S.; Jin, R.; Novick, R. P. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A 2005, 102, 1691-1696.
- (48) Fleming, V.; Feil, E.; Sewell, A. K.; Day, N.; Buckling, A.; Massey, R. C. J. Bacteriol. 2006, 188, 7686-7688.
- (49) Lyon, G. J.; Wright, J. S.; Muir, T. W.; Novick, R. P.
Biochemistry 2002, 41, 10095-10104. - (50) Scott, R. J.; Lian, L. Y.; Muharram, S. H.; Cockayne, A.; Wood, S. J.; Bycroft, B. W.; Williams, P.; Chan, W. C. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 2003, 13, 2449-2453.
- (51) George, E. A.; Novick, R. P.; Muir, T. W. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2008, 130, 4914-4924.
- (52) Fowler, S. A.; Stacy, D. M.; Blackwell, H. E. Org. Lett. 2008, 10, 2329-2332.
- (53) Chan, W. C.; Coyle, B. J.; Williams, P. J. Med. Chem. 2004, 47, 4633-4641.
- (54) Lyon, G. J.; Novick, R. P. Peptides 2004, 25, 1389-1403.
- (55) Thoendel, M.; Kavanaugh, J. S.; Flack, C. E.; Horswill, A. R. Chem. Rev. 2011, 111, 117-151.
- (56) Gorske, B. C.; Blackwell, H. E. Org. Biomol. Chem. 2006, 4, 1441-1445.
- (57) Campbell, J.; Lin, Q.; Geske, G. D.; Blackwell, H. E. ACS Chem. Biol. 2009, 4, 1051-1059.
- (58) Kirchdoerfer, R. N.; Garner, A. L.; Flack, C. E.; Mee, J. M.; Horswill, A. R.; Janda, K. D.; Kaufmann, G. F.; Wilson, I. A. J. Biol. Chem. 2011, 286, 17351-17358.
- (59) Malone, C. L.; Boles, B. R.; Horswill, A. R. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 2007, 73, 6036-6044.
- (60) Schlievert, P. M.; Blomster, D. A. J. Infect. Dis. 1983, 147, 236-242.
- (61) Otto, M.; Echner, H.; Voelter, W.; Gotz, F. Infect. Immun. 2001, 69, 1957-1960.
- (62) Sewing, A.; Hilvert, D. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 2001, 40, 3395-3396.
- (63) Swinnen, D.; Hilvert, D. Org. Lett. 2000, 2, 2439-2442.
- (64) Dawson, P. E.; Muir, T. W.; Clarklewis, I.; Kent, S. B. H. Science 1994, 266, 776-779.
- (65) Blevins, J. S.; Beenken, K. E.; Elasri, M. O.; Hurlburt, B. K.; Smeltzer, M. S. Infect. Immun. 2002, 70, 470-480.
- (66) Lopes, M. D.; Teixeira, L. M. Rev. Microbiol. 1992, 23, 59-65.
- (67) Naider, F., and Goodman, M. (2002) Historical Aspects, in Synthesis of Peptides and Peptidomimetics (Goodman, M., Toniolo, C., Moroder, L., and Felix, A., Eds.) 4th ed., pp 1-16, Thieme, Stuttgart New York.
- (68) Adessi, C., and Soto, C. (2002) Converting a peptide into a drug: Strategies to improve stability and bioavailability, Curr Med Chem 9, 963-978.
- (69) Rezai, T., Bock, J. E., Zhou, M. V., Kalyanaraman, C., Lokey, R. S., and Jacobson, M. P. (2006) Conformational flexibility, internal hydrogen bonding, and passive membrane permeability: Successful in silico prediction of the relative permeabilities of cyclic peptides, J Am Chem Soc 128, 14073-14080.
- (70) White, T. R., Renzelman, C. M., Rand, A. C., Rezai, T., McEwen, C. M., Gelev, V. M., Turner, R. A., Linington, R. G., Leung, S. S. F., Kalgutkar, A. S., Bauman, J. N., Zhang, Y. Z., Liras, S., Price, D. A., Mathiowetz, A. M., Jacobson, M. P., and Lokey, R. S. (2011) On-resin N-methylation of cyclic peptides for discovery of orally bioavailable scaffolds, Nat Chem Biol 7, 810-817.
- (71) Boeglin, D., Xiang, Z., Sorenson, N. B., Wood, M. S., Haskell-Luevano, C., and Lubell, W. D. (2006) Aza-scanning of the potent melanocortin receptor agonist Ac-His-D-Phe-Arg-Trp-NH2, Chem Bio Drug Des 67, 275-283.
- (72) Walensky, L. D., Kung, A. L., Escher, I., Malia, T. J., Barbuto, S., Wright, R. D., Wagner, G., Verdine, G. L., and Korsmeyer, S. J. (2004) Activation of Apoptosis in Vivo by a Hydrocarbon-Stapled BH3 Helix, Science 305, 1466-1470.
- (73) Beck, J. G., Chatterjee, J., Laufer, B., Kiran, M. U., Frank, A. O., Neubauer, S., Ovadia, O., Greenberg, S., Gilon, C., Hoffman, A., and Kessler, H. (2012) Intestinal Permeability of Cyclic Peptides: Common Key Backbone Motifs Identified, J Am Chem Soc 134, 12125-12133.
- (74) Ovadia, O.; Greenberg, S.; Laufer, B.; Gilon, C.; Hoffman, A.; Kessler, H., Improvement of drug-like properties of peptides: the somatostatin paradigm. Expert Opin Drug Dis 2010, 5, (7), 655-671.
- (75) Zuckermann, R. N.; Kerr, J. M.; Kent, S. B. H.; Moos, W. H., Efficient Method for the Preparation of Peptoids [Oligo(N-Substituted Glycines)] by Submonomer Solid-Phase Synthesis. J Am Chem Soc 1992, 114, (26), 10646-10647.
- (76) Pedroso, E.; Grandas, A.; Delasheras, X.; Eritja, R.; Giralt, E., Diketopiperazine Formation in Solid-Phase Peptide-Synthesis Using P-Alkoxybenzyl Ester Resins and Fmoc-Amino Acids. Tetrahedron Lett 1986, 27, (6), 743-746.
- (77) Khosla, M. C.; Smeby, R. R.; Bumpus, F. M., Failure sequence in solid-phase peptide synthesis due to the presence of an N-alkylamino acid. J Am Chem Soc 1972, 94, (13), 4721-4724.
- (78) Schnolzer, M., Alewood, P., Jones, A., Alewood, D., and Kent, S. B. H. 2007, In situ neutralization in boc-chemistry solid phase peptide synthesis—Rapid, high yield assembly of difficult sequences, Int J Pept Res Ther 13, 31-44.
- (79) Cardenal, C., Vollrath, S. B. L., Schepers, U., and Brase, S. 2012, Synthesis of Functionalized Glutamine- and Asparagine-Type Peptoids—Scope and Limitations, Helvetica Chimica Acta 95, 2237-2248.
- (80) Culf A. S. and Ouellette, R. J. (2010) Solid-Phase synthesis of N-substituted Glycine Oligomers(alpha-peptoids) and derivatives.
Claims (20)
1. A compound of formula:
or salts thereof where:
L is a divalent linker moiety 3 to 10 atoms in length;
Z is a divalent linker moiety 3 to 12 atoms in length;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group;
R6 and R7 are independently selected from hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; where, when R1 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R6 is a hydrogen or a methyl group and when R2 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl group, R7 is a hydrogen or a methyl group;
R10 is hydrogen or a methyl group;
R5 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl group or R5 is:
H2N—CHR12—, H2N—CHR12—CO—NR14—, H2N—CHR12—CO—NR14—CHR12—, R15—CO—NR14—, or R15—CO—NR14—CHR12, where each R12 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-6 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; R14 is hydrogen, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group; and R15 is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1-8 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or an optionally substituted heteroaryl group where, when R5 is H2N—CHR12—CO—NR14— and R12 is a group other than hydrogen or a methyl, R14 is hydrogen or a methyl group;
wherein optional substitution is substitution with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, oxo group, thioxo group, azide group, cyanate group, isocyanate group, acyl group, haloalkyl group, alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, phenyl group, benzyl group, halogen or alkyl substituted benzyl group, alkoxy group, alkylthio group, and mercapto group; and
wherein the compound is not AIP-I, AIP-II, AIP-III, AIP-IV, tAIP-1D2A or the cyclic thioester (C-A-F-L-L).
2. The compound of claim 1 , wherein L is
—(CH2)1-4—O—CO—, —(CH2)1-4—NH—CO—, —(CH2)1-2—O—(CH2)1-2—CO—, —(CH2)2-5—CO—, —CO—(CH2)1-4—CO—, or —CH2—NHCONH—CH2—.
3. The compound of claim 1 , wherein L is —CH2—X—CO—, where X is, S, O or NH.
4. The compound of claim 1 , wherein L is —CH2—NH—CO—.
5-20. (canceled)
21. A compound of formula:
or salts thereof where:
L is —CH2—X—CO—, where X is, S, O or NH;
R1 and R2 are iso-butyl groups;
R3 is an optionally substituted phenyl or an optionally substituted benzyl group;
R4 is selected from a C1-C3 alkyl group or a —CH2—COOH group;
R12 and R′12 are independently selected from a C1-C4 alkyl group, a —CH2—CO—NH2 group or a —CH2—CH2—CO—NH2 group;
R6 and R7 are hydrogens; and
R8, R9, R10 and R14 are each selected from hydrogen or a methyl group, wherein one of R8, R9, R10 or R14 is a methyl group,
wherein optional substitution is substitution with one or more halogens, hydroxyl groups or alkyl groups having 1-3 carbon atoms; and
wherein each amino acid is an L-amino acid.
22. A compound of formula:
or salts thereof where:
L is —CH2—X—CO—, where X is, S, O or NH;
R1 and R2 are iso-butyl groups;
R3 is an optionally substituted phenyl or an optionally substituted benzyl group;
R4 is selected from a C1-C3 alkyl group or a —CH2—COOH group;
R12 and R′12 are independently selected from a C1-C4 alkyl group, a —CH2—CO—NH2 group or a —CH2—CH2—CO—NH2 group;
R6, R7, R8, R9, R10 are hydrogens; and
R14 is a methyl group,
wherein optional substitution is substitution with one or more halogens, hydroxyl groups or alkyl groups having 1-3 carbon atoms; and
wherein each amino acid is an L-amino acid.
23. The compound or salt of claim 22 , wherein L is —CH2—SCO—.
24. The compound or salt of claim 22 , wherein R3 is an optionally substituted benzyl group.
25. The compound or salt of claim 22 , wherein R4 is a —CH2—COOH group.
26. The compound or salt of claim 22 , wherein R12 is a —CH2—CO—NH2 group.
27. The compound or salt of claim 22 , wherein R′12 is a sec-butyl group.
28. The compound or salt of claim 22 , wherein R′12 is a C4 alkyl group.
29. The compound or salt of claim 22 which is I—NMeN—(CDFLL) or a salt thereof.
30. A pharmaceutical composition which comprises a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds or salts of claim 21 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
31. A method for regulating virulence in Staphylococcus which comprises the step of contacting the bacterium with one or more compounds or salts of claim 21 .
32. The method of claim 31 for attenuating virulence in a strain of Staphylococcus.
33. The method of claim 32 wherein the production of toxic shock syndrome toxin-1 is attenuated.
34. A method of treating staphylococcal infection which comprises administering to an individual in need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of claim 21 .
35. The method of claim 34 wherein the staphylococcal infection is a Staphylococcus aureus infection.
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US16/737,749 US20200140489A1 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2020-01-08 | Peptide-Based Quorum Sensing Inhibitors for the Attenuation of Virulence in Staphylococcus Aureus |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US201313792977A | 2013-03-11 | 2013-03-11 | |
| US14/109,193 US9227996B2 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2013-12-17 | Peptide-based quorum sensing inhibitors for the attenuation of virulence in Staphylococcus aureus |
| US14/987,457 US20160194360A1 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2016-01-04 | Peptide-based quorum sensing inhibitors for the attenuation of virulence in staphylococcus aureus |
| US16/737,749 US20200140489A1 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2020-01-08 | Peptide-Based Quorum Sensing Inhibitors for the Attenuation of Virulence in Staphylococcus Aureus |
Related Parent Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US14/987,457 Continuation US20160194360A1 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2016-01-04 | Peptide-based quorum sensing inhibitors for the attenuation of virulence in staphylococcus aureus |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| US20200140489A1 true US20200140489A1 (en) | 2020-05-07 |
Family
ID=51488523
Family Applications (3)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US14/109,193 Active US9227996B2 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2013-12-17 | Peptide-based quorum sensing inhibitors for the attenuation of virulence in Staphylococcus aureus |
| US14/987,457 Abandoned US20160194360A1 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2016-01-04 | Peptide-based quorum sensing inhibitors for the attenuation of virulence in staphylococcus aureus |
| US16/737,749 Abandoned US20200140489A1 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2020-01-08 | Peptide-Based Quorum Sensing Inhibitors for the Attenuation of Virulence in Staphylococcus Aureus |
Family Applications Before (2)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US14/109,193 Active US9227996B2 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2013-12-17 | Peptide-based quorum sensing inhibitors for the attenuation of virulence in Staphylococcus aureus |
| US14/987,457 Abandoned US20160194360A1 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2016-01-04 | Peptide-based quorum sensing inhibitors for the attenuation of virulence in staphylococcus aureus |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (3) | US9227996B2 (en) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US11560361B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2023-01-24 | Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation | Simplified structural mimetics of AIPS as quorum sensing inhibitors |
Families Citing this family (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| EP2964245A4 (en) * | 2013-01-19 | 2016-09-21 | Univ New York | PEPTIDES AND PEPTIDOMIMETIC HYDROGEN-LINKED SUBSTITUTE FOR REACTIVATION OF P53 |
| JP6076509B2 (en) * | 2014-02-07 | 2017-02-08 | ミヤリサン製薬株式会社 | Peptide having activity to suppress toxin production of Clostridium bacteria |
| WO2017192442A2 (en) * | 2016-05-01 | 2017-11-09 | Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation | Peptidic modulators of quorum sensing in staphyloccoccus epidermidis |
| US10267792B2 (en) | 2016-09-09 | 2019-04-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Device for detecting toxic shock syndrome toxins and method of making the same |
| CN106434853B (en) * | 2016-10-10 | 2019-12-03 | 大连民族大学 | A Drug Screening Model Targeting Histidine Kinase AgrC |
| EP4161481A4 (en) * | 2020-06-05 | 2024-09-25 | The Rockefeller University | ANTIBACTERIAL SYNTHETIC-BIOINFORMATIC NATURAL PRODUCTS AND THEIR USE |
Family Cites Families (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| GB9724859D0 (en) | 1997-11-26 | 1998-01-21 | Univ Nottingham | Compounds and their use as antibacterial agents |
| US6337385B1 (en) | 1998-06-24 | 2002-01-08 | The Rockefeller University | Staphylococcus peptides for bacterial interference |
| US7419954B2 (en) | 1998-06-24 | 2008-09-02 | The Rockefeller University | Staphylococcus peptides for bacterial interference |
| KR20110124375A (en) | 2002-08-13 | 2011-11-16 | 햅토젠 리미티드 | Method of treating infectious bacterial disease using anti-lactone or lactone induced signal molecule antibody |
| US20110152176A1 (en) | 2008-06-17 | 2011-06-23 | University Of Iowa Research Foundation | Agr-mediated inhibition and dispersal of biofilms |
-
2013
- 2013-12-17 US US14/109,193 patent/US9227996B2/en active Active
-
2016
- 2016-01-04 US US14/987,457 patent/US20160194360A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2020
- 2020-01-08 US US16/737,749 patent/US20200140489A1/en not_active Abandoned
Cited By (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US11560361B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2023-01-24 | Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation | Simplified structural mimetics of AIPS as quorum sensing inhibitors |
| US12139464B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2024-11-12 | Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation | Simplified structural mimetics of AIPS as quorum sensing inhibitors |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| US20140256615A1 (en) | 2014-09-11 |
| US20160194360A1 (en) | 2016-07-07 |
| US9227996B2 (en) | 2016-01-05 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US20200140489A1 (en) | Peptide-Based Quorum Sensing Inhibitors for the Attenuation of Virulence in Staphylococcus Aureus | |
| KR102855963B1 (en) | Peptide macrocycles against Acinetobacter baumannii | |
| KR102890185B1 (en) | Bicyclic peptide ligand specific for EphA2 | |
| US9783573B2 (en) | IAP antagonists | |
| EP2872521B1 (en) | Iap antagonists | |
| US12329799B2 (en) | Peptidyl inhibitors of calcineurin-NFAT interaction | |
| Socha et al. | Diversity-oriented synthesis of cyclic acyldepsipeptides leads to the discovery of a potent antibacterial agent | |
| CN113543813B (en) | CD38 specific bicyclic peptide ligands | |
| JP5858924B2 (en) | Template-immobilized peptide mimetic having CCR10 antagonistic action | |
| CN104284664A (en) | Broad spectrum antibiotic arylomycin analogs | |
| CN106661084A (en) | Macrocyclic broad spectrum antibiotics | |
| CN103209700A (en) | Broad spectrum antibiotic Arylomycin analogs | |
| Sarciaux et al. | Total synthesis and structure–activity relationships study of odilorhabdins, a new class of peptides showing potent antibacterial activity | |
| WO2017218922A2 (en) | Compositions and methods for the treatment of bacterial infections | |
| KR20190093600A (en) | Antibacterial peptide | |
| CN105658670A (en) | Peptide-oligourea chimeric compounds and methods of use thereof | |
| EP2764010B9 (en) | Template-fixed peptidomimetics as inhibitors of fpr1 | |
| CA2460646A1 (en) | Antibacterial macrocycles | |
| US6153585A (en) | Arylsulfonanilide derivatives | |
| Yang et al. | Facile solid phase synthesis of N-cycloguanidinyl-formyl peptides | |
| JP5625910B2 (en) | Peptide compound and method for producing the same | |
| Seedorf | Synthesis of an oligopeptide library | |
| WO2023178378A1 (en) | Mip inhibitors | |
| Roshna | Synthetic oligomers with heterogeneous backbones featuring alpha/beta-conjugated building blocks | |
| HK1225399B (en) | Beta-hairpin peptidomimetics |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| AS | Assignment |
Owner name: WISCONSIN ALUMNI RESEARCH FOUNDATION, WISCONSIN Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:BLACKWELL, HELEN;TAL-GAN, YFTAH;STACY, DANIELLE;SIGNING DATES FROM 20130409 TO 20130411;REEL/FRAME:051537/0094 |
|
| STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |